2014 x1 PDF

Contents Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine
THE BMW X1.

OWNER'S MANUAL.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 957 353 - X/14

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
X1 Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
It contains important information on vehicle operation that will
help you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive.
BMW AG
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

© 2014 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
deutsch X/14, 11 14 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Addendum
ADDENDUM TO BMW X1 OWNER’S

MANUAL 1402957353
We wanted to provide you with some vehicle and for maintenance under
updates and clarifications with respect to the Maintenance Program during
the printed BMW Owner’s Manual. the applicable warranty and
These updates and clarifications will maintenance coverage periods, you
supersede the materials contained in are free to elect, both during those
that document. periods and thereafter, to have
maintenance and repair work
1. Where the terms “service center,” provided by other service centers or
“the service center,” “your service repair shops.
center,” “service specialist,’ or
“service” are used in the Owner’s 3. Where the Owner’s Manual makes
Manual, we wanted to clarify that reference to parts and accessories
the terms refer to a BMW dealer’s having been approved by BMW,
service center or another service those references are intended to
center or repair shop that employs reflect that those parts and
trained personnel that can perform accessories are recommended by
maintenance and repair work on BMW of North America LLC. You
your vehicle in accordance with may elect to use other parts and
BMW specifications. accessories, but, if you do, we
recommend that you make sure that
2. Where the text of the Owner’s any such parts and/or accessories
Manual contains an affirmative are appropriate for use on your
instruction to contact a “service vehicle.
center” or “your service center,” we
wanted to clarify that BMW 4. At page 6 and page 7, under the
recommends that, if you are faced warranty section’s discussion of
with one of the situations addressed homologation, where it states that
by that text, you contact or seek the you “cannot lodge warranty claims
assistance of a BMW dealer’s for your vehicle there,” the text
service center or another service should read that you “may not be
center or repair shop that employs able to lodge warranty claims for
trained personnel that can perform your vehicle there.”
maintenance and repair work on
your vehicle in accordance with 5. At page 7, in the “Parts and
BMW specifications. accessories” section, the sentence
beginning “For your own safety, it is
While BMW of North America LLC, recommended . . . ,” should be
at no cost to you, will pay for repairs disregarded and the following the
required by the limited warranties text should be read in lieu thereof:
provided with respect to your “The manufacturer of your vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Addendum
recommends using genuine parts the maintenance carried out by your

and accessories approved by service center.”
BMW.”
9. At page 196, under “Telephone,”
In the fifth sentence of that the heading that reads “Approved
paragraph, the word “cannot” mobile phones” should read
should read “does not.” “Compatible mobile phones.”
6. At page 47, in the “Checking and 10. At page 222 and page 223, under
replacing safety belts” section, the the heading “Apps” and subheading
text beginning, “Have the work “Requirements,” the section that
performed only by your service begins, “Use only . . . ,” should be
center . . .” should be disregarded disregarded and the following text
and the following text should be should be read in lieu thereof: “The
read in lieu thereof: “BMW manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having this work recommends the use of BMW
performed by a service center as it recommended software; otherwise
is important that this safety feature there may be malfunctions in
functions properly.” system operations.”
7. At page 131 and page 132 under 11. At page 230, under the heading
the heading: “Objects in the area “Pressure specifications,” the
around the pedals” and at page 263 sentence beginning, “The inflation
and page 264 under the heading: pressures apply to the tire
“Carpets and floor mats,” the sizes . . . .” should be disregarded.
paragraph that begins: “Only use
floor mats . . .” should be 12. At page 238, under the heading:
disregarded and the following “Approved wheels and tires,” the
language should be read in lieu term “Approved” should be
thereof: “The manufacturer of your disregarded and in lieu thereof, the
vehicle recommends that you use term “Recommended” should be
floor mats that have been identified read in its place. In addition, the
by it as appropriate for use in your text of that section should be
vehicle and that can be properly disregarded and the following text
fixed in place.” should be read in lieu thereof:
8. At page 138, under the heading: The manufacturer of your vehicle

“Have maintenance carried out,” the strongly suggests that you use
sentence beginning, “Have the wheels and tires that have been
maintenance carried out . . .” should recommended by the vehicle
be disregarded and the following manufacturer for your vehicle type;
text should be read in lieu thereof: otherwise, for example, despite
“BMW recommends that you have having the same official size ratings,
variations can lead to body contact
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Addendum
and with it, the risk of severe 16. At page 243 and 244, under the
accidents. heading: “Alternative oil types,” the
text preceding the chart should be
The manufacturer of your vehicle disregarded, and in lieu thereof
does not evaluate non- should be read as follows: “If an
recommended wheels and tires to engine oil suitable for continuous
determine if they are suitable for use is not available, up to 1 US
use on your vehicle. quart/liter of an engine oil with the
following oil rating can be
13. At page 239, under the heading: added: . . .”
“Snow chains,” the first paragraph
should be disregarded and the 17. At page 244, under the heading:
following text should be read in lieu “Oil change,” the text should be
thereof: disregarded and in lieu thereof
should be read as follows:
Only certain types of fine-link snow
chains have been tested by the BMW recommends that you have
manufacturer of your vehicle and the oil changed at your BMW
are determined by the manufacturer dealer’s service center or at another
of your vehicle to be road safe and service center that has trained
are recommended by the personnel that can perform the work
manufacturer of your vehicle. in accordance with BMW
specifications.
Information about recommended
snow chains is available from a 18. At page 245 and page 246, under
service center. the heading: “Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US models
14. At page 241, under the heading and Warranty and Service Guide
“Hood,” the sentence beginning, “If Booklet for Canadian models,” the
you are unfamiliar” should be second paragraph should be
disregarded. disregarded and the following text
read in lieu thereof:
15. At page 243, under the heading:
“Approved oil types,” the references The manufacturer of your vehicle
to “Approved” should be read as recommends that you have
“Suitable.” Immediately preceding maintenance and repair performed
the “Gasoline engine” chart, the by your BMW dealer’s service
following sentence should be center or another service center or
inserted: “Add engine oils that meet repair shop that employs trained
the following oil rating personnel that can perform
standards: . . .” The reference to maintenance and repair work on
“BMW High Performance SAE 5W- your vehicle in accordance with
30” should be disregarded. BMW specifications. The
manufacturer of your vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Addendum
recommends that you maintain messages of these comfort

records of all maintenance and functions are no longer displayed.
repair work performed on your
vehicle.
19. At page 248 and page 250, where it

reads: “Do not perform work/bulb
replacement on xenon headlamps,”
that text should be disregarded and
in lieu thereof the following text
should be read: “Xenon headlamp
work or replacement can cause
serious and fatal injuries.” In the
text that follows, where it reads:
“[h]ave any work on the xenon
lighting system . . . ,” the following
words should be read as preceding
that passage: “It is strongly
suggested that you . . . .”
20. At page 253, under the “Battery

replacement” section, the text
should be disregarded and in lieu
thereof the following text should be
read:
Use of recommended vehicle

batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle

recommends that you use vehicle
batteries that it has tested and
recommends for use in your vehicle;
otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions
may not be fully available.
After a battery replacement, the

manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that you have the
battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all
comfort functions are fully available,
and that any “check control”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Entertainment
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 164 Tone
page 278. 166 Radio
174 CD/multimedia
6 Notes Communications
196 Telephone
At a glance
207 Office
12 Cockpit
216 Contacts
18 iDrive
219 ConnectedDrive
25 Voice activation system
Mobility
Controls
226 Refueling
30 Opening and closing
228 Fuel
44 Adjusting
230 Wheels and tires
52 Transporting children safely
240 Engine compartment
57 Driving
245 Maintenance
71 Displays
247 Replacing components
83 Lamps
255 Breakdown assistance
88 Safety
261 Care
97 Driving stability control systems
101 Driving comfort Reference
108 Climate 268 Technical data
113 Interior equipment 270 Short commands for voice activation
123 Storage compartments system
278 Everything from A to Z
Driving tips
130 Things to remember when driving
134 Loading
137 Saving fuel
Navigation
142 Navigation system
144 Destination entry
153 Destination guidance
161 What to do if...
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual series.Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐
scribes and depicts equipment that may not be
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ contained in your vehicle because of the se‐
ular topic is by using the index. lected special equipment or country version,
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in for example.
the first chapter. This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
Additional sources of information
For options and equipment not described in
Should you have any questions, your service this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐
center will be glad to advise you at any time. plementary Owner's Manuals.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls
available on the Internet: bmwusa.com are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐
trations.
Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed Status of this Owner's
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of Manual at time of printing
personal injury and serious damage to the
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
vehicle.
policy of constant development that is con‐
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
information. embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
select individual functions. scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice those in your vehicle.
activation system.
Updates made after the editorial
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
deadline
voice activation system.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
Refers to measures that can be taken to for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐
help protect the environment. pendix of the printed quick reference for the
vehicle.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for For your own safety
information on a particular part or assembly.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
Vehicle equipment operating conditions and registration require‐
This Owner's Manual describes all models, all ments applying in the country of first delivery
series equipment, as well as country-specific — homologation. If your vehicle is to be oper‐
and special equipment offered in the model ated in a different country it might be neces‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Notes
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ‐ components, brake dust shields, telephones,
ing operating conditions and permit including operation of any mobile phone from
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply within the vehicle without using an externally
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐ mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment,
tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or
for your vehicle there. Further information can similar accessories, may cause extensive dam‐
be obtained from your Service Center. age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, in‐
terfere with the vehicle's electrical system or
Maintenance and repairs affect the validity of the BMW Limited War‐
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern ranty. See your BMW center for additional in‐
materials and high-performance electronics, formation. Maintenance, replacement, or repair
requires suitable maintenance and repair of the emission control devices and systems
methods. may be performed by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using any certified
Therefore, have this work performed only by a
automotive part.
BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
California Proposition 65 Warning
ately trained personnel.
California laws require us to state the following
If this work is not carried out properly, there is warning:
the danger of subsequent damage and related
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
safety hazards.
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
Parts and accessories cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
For your own safety, it is recommended that State of California to cause cancer and birth
you use genuine parts and accessories ap‐ defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
proved by BMW. When you purchase accesso‐ certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
ries tested and approved by BMW and Genu‐ products of component wear contain or emit
ine BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire chemicals known to the State of California to
the assurance that they have been thoroughly cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
tested by BMW to ensure optimum perform‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
ance when installed on your vehicle. BMW lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
warrants these parts to be free from defects in pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
material and workmanship. BMW will not ac‐ engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cept any liability for damage resulting from in‐ cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
stallation of parts and accessories not ap‐ your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
proved by BMW. BMW cannot test every water.
product made by other manufacturers to verify
if it can be used on a BMW safely and without Service and warranty
risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its
We recommend that you read this publication
occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Acces‐
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
sories and other products approved by BMW,
lowing warranties:
together with professional advice on using
these items, are available from all BMW cen‐ ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
ters. Installation and operation of non BMW ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7
Notes
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Data memory

ranty
Numerous electronic components in your vehi‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
cle contain data memories that store technical
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ information on the vehicle condition, events
ited Warranty and faults, either temporarily or permanently.
Detailed information about these warranties is This technical information generally docu‐
listed in the Service and Warranty Information ments the state of a component, a module, a
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and system or the environment.
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. ▷ Operating conditions of system compo‐
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and nents, such as filling levels.
designed to meet the particular operating con‐ ▷ Status messages from the vehicle and its
ditions and homologation requirements in your individual components, such as wheel rpm/
country and continental region in order to de‐ speed, motion delay, transverse accelera‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle tion.
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
▷ Malfunctions and defects in important sys‐
to operate your vehicle in another country or
tem components, such as lights and
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
brakes.
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements. ▷ Vehicle responses to special driving situa‐
You should also be aware of any applicable tions, such as airbag deployment, use of
warranty limitations or exclusions for such the stability control systems.
country or region. In such case, please contact ▷ Ambient conditions, such as the tempera‐
Customer Relations for further information. ture.
These data are of a technical nature only and
Maintenance are used to detect and eliminate faults and to
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the optimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of
road safety, operational reliability and the New routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre‐
Vehicle Limited Warranty. ated from these data. If services are used, for
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ instance in the event of repairs, service proc‐
ures: esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc.,
this technical information can be read out from
▷ BMW Maintenance system
the event and fault data memories by service
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet personnel, including the manufacturer, using
for US models special diagnosis tools. This service personnel
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for can provide you with more information if
Canadian models needed. After troubleshooting, the information
If the vehicle is not maintained according to in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten
these specifications, this could result in seri‐ continuously.
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is Situations are conceivable during the use of
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited the vehicle in which these technical data could
Warranty. become associated with a specific person in
combination with other information, such as an
accident report, damage to the vehicle, wit‐
ness accounts, etc., possibly with the involve‐
ment of an authorized expert.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8
Notes
Additional functions that are contractually enforcement, that have the special equipment,
agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐ can read the information if they have access to
calization in the event of an emergency, permit the vehicle or the EDR.
the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the
vehicle.
Reporting safety defects
Event Data Recorder EDR For US customers
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ The following only applies to vehicles owned
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to and operated in the US.
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform
standing how a vehicle's systems performed. the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
The EDR is designed to record data related to tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
less. 1-800-831-1117.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
such data as: open an investigation, and if it finds that a
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
operating. may order a recall and remedy campaign.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
safety belts were fastened. individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
These data can help provide a better under‐ www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
standing of the circumstances in which NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
crashes and injuries occur. ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a formation about motor vehicle safety from
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are http://www.safercar.gov
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, For Canadian customers
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. Canadian customers who wish to report a
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ safety- related defect to Transport Canada,
ment, could combine the EDR data with the Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele‐
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
quired during a crash investigation. You can also obtain other information about
To read data recorded by an EDR, special motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ roadsafety.
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle equipment special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all series equipment as systems.
well as country-specific and special equipment
When using the features and systems descri‐
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also
bed here, adhere to local regulations.
describes equipment that may not be found in
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected
All around the steering wheel
1 Safety switch for rear power win‐ Automatic headlamp con‐

dows 41 trol 84
2 Power windows 40 Adaptive Light Control 84
3 Exterior mirror operation 49 High-beam Assistant 85
4 Lamps Front fog lamps 86
Parking lamps 83
5 Steering column stalk, left

Low beams 83
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12
Cockpit At a glance
Turn signal 62 Change the radio station

Select a music track
High beams, head‐ Scroll through the redial list
lamp flasher 85
High-beam Assistant 85 Next entertainment source
Roadside parking lamps 85 Recirculated air mode 110
Computer 73
10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 57
Settings and information about
the vehicle 74 11 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 62
Instrument lighting 87
Rain sensor 63
6 Steering wheel buttons, left
Telephone 196
Rear window wiper 64
Volume
12 Ignition lock 57
13 Steering wheel heating 51
Activate/deactivate the voice acti‐
vation system 25
14 Horn, the entire surface
7 Shift paddles 67
15 Adjust the steering wheel 51
8 Instrument cluster 14
16 Cruise control 101
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
17 Opening tailgate 36
18 Releasing the hood 241
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13
At a glance Cockpit
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer ▷ Hill Descent Control 99

2 Indicator/warning lamps 15 ▷ Computer 73
3 Tachometer 72 ▷ Date of next scheduled service, and re‐
4 Current fuel consumption 72 maining distance to be driven 78
Engine oil temperature 72 ▷ Odometer and trip odometer 71
5 Display for ▷ Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor 94
▷ Clock 71 ▷ Checking engine oil level 241
▷ External temperature 71 ▷ Settings and information 74
▷ Indicator/warning lamps 15 ▷ Check Control message

present 80
▷ Cruise control 101
7 Fuel gauge 72
6 Display for
8 Resetting the trip odometer 71
▷ Automatic transmission position 66
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14
Cockpit At a glance
Indicator/warning lights Symbol Function or system
Front fog lamps, refer to page 86

The concept
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the pro‐
pulsive forces in order to maintain
driving stability, refer to page 97
The parking brake is set, refer to

page 61
The indicator and warning lights can light up in Canada: the parking brake is set, re‐
a variety of combinations and colors. fer to page 61
Several of the lights are checked for proper

Engine malfunction with adverse ef‐
functioning when the engine is started or the
fect on emissions, refer to
ignition is switched on, and light up briefly.
page 246
Canada: engine malfunction with

Text messages
adverse effect on exhaust emis‐
Text messages at the upper edge of the Con‐ sions, refer to page 246
trol Display explain the meaning of the dis‐
played indicator and warning lights.
Supplementary text messages

You can call up additional information, e.g., on
the cause of a malfunction and on how to re‐
spond, via Check Control, refer to page 80.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding light comes on.
Indicator lights without text messages

The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
Symbol Function or system
Turn signals, refer to page 62
High-beams/headlamp flasher, refer

to page 85
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
15
At a glance Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Headliner 17 Deactivate the Automatic Engine

2 Control Display 18 Start/Stop Function 59
3 Air vent 111 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

4 Hazard warning system 255 trol 97
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 98
Central locking system 35
ECO PRO 138
5 Automatic climate control 108

9 Selector lever with automatic transmis‐
6 Glove compartment 123
sion 65
7 Radio and CD/DVD drive 166
10 Controller with buttons 18
Programmable memory buttons 22
8 PDC Park Distance Control 103
rearview camera 105
HDC Hill Descent Control 99
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
16
Cockpit At a glance
All around the headliner
1 Emergency Request 255 4 Reading lamps 87
2 Panoramic glass sunroof 41 5 Interior lamps 87
3 Indicator lamp for the front pas‐

senger airbags 90
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
17
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment The buttons can be used to open the me‐
nus directly. The controller can be used to
This chapter describes all series equipment as
select menu items and create the settings.
describes equipment that may not be found in Control Display
special equipment or the country version. This Notes
also applies to safety-related functions and ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
systems. care instructions, refer to page 264.
When using the features and systems descri‐ ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
bed here, adhere to local regulations. Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
be damaged.
The concept Switching off

The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐
1. Press the button.
tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be
operated from a central location. 2. "Switch off control display"
Using the iDrive during a trip

To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Controls at a glance
Switching on
Controls
Press the controller again to switch the screen
back on.
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
18
iDrive At a glance
Controller Press the but‐ Function

Select menu items and create settings. ton
1. Turn. NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the Telephone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Operating concept
Opening the main menu
2. Press.
Press the button.
3. Move in four directions.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Selecting menu items

Menu items shown in white can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.
Buttons on controller
Press the but‐ Function

ton
MENU Opens the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia

menu.
2. Press the controller.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
19
At a glance iDrive
Menu items in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels

After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Additional options: move the controller to the
The current panel is closed and the previ‐ right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
ous panel is displayed. displayed.
The previous panel is opened again by
pressing the BACK button. In this case, the Options menu
current panel is not closed. The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ Move the controller to the right. ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Switch off control
A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐ display".
ous display. ▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Store
station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
View of an opened menu

When a menu is opened, it generally opens
with the panel that was last selected in that
menu. To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller 3. Press the controller.
twice.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Opening the Options menu Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
Press the button.
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
20
iDrive At a glance
The function is activated. 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐

The function is deactivated. lighted, and then press the controller.
Example: setting the clock

Setting the clock
1. Press the button. The main menu is

displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
lighted, and then press the controller. 6. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
Status field
The following information is displayed in the
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left status field at the top right:
to display "Time/Date". ▷ Time.
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is ▷ Current entertainment source.
highlighted, and then press the controller.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
▷ Telephone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
Status field symbols

The symbols are grouped into various catego‐
ries.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio™ is switched on.
Satellite radio is switched on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
21
At a glance iDrive
Telephone symbols Split screen

Symbol Meaning General information
Incoming or outgoing call. Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
Missed call. from the computer.
Wireless network reception In the divided screen view, the so-called split
strength Symbol flashes: searching screen, this information remains visible even
for network. when you change to another menu.
Wireless network is not available.

Switching the split screen on and off
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
2. "Split screen"
Text message, e-mail was received.
Selecting the display
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked. 1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"
SIM card is missing.
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
Enter the PIN. selected.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
Entertainment symbols content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
USB audio interface.
Music interface for smartphones.
Additional symbols Programmable memory

buttons
Symbol Meaning
Spoken instructions are switched

General information
off. The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Request of the current vehicle posi‐ rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tion.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
22
iDrive At a glance
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the 2. Select additional letters or numbers if
menu. needed.
The settings are stored for the remote control 3. "OK": confirm the entry.
currently in use.
Symbol Function
Saving a function
Press the controller: delete the let‐
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. ter or number.
2. Press the desired button for more Press the controller for an extended
than two seconds. period: delete all letters or numbers.
Enter a blank space.

Running a function
Press the button.
Switching between letters and
The function will run immediately. This numbers
means, for example, that the number is dialed
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
when a phone number is selected.
tween entering letters and numbers.
Symbol Function
Displaying the button assignment
Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear Enter the letters.
gloves or use objects.
Enter the numbers.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Switching between upper and lower
case letters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering uppercase and lowercase let‐
ters.
Symbol Function
Move the controller forward:

switch from upper to lower case
letters.
▷ To display short information: touch the
button. Move the controller forward:
switch from lower to upper case
▷ To display detailed information: touch the
letters.
button for an extended period.
Entry comparison
Entering letters and numbers Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ and letters may be added automatically.
bers.
The entries are continuously compared to the
data stored in the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
23
At a glance iDrive
▷ Only those letters are offered during the

entry for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: town/city names can
be entered using the spelling of language
available on the Control Display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
24
Voice activation system At a glance
Voice activation system

Vehicle equipment Using voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
special equipment or the country version. This 2. Wait for the signal.
also applies to safety-related functions and 3. Say the command.
systems. The command appears on the Control Dis‐
When using the features and systems descri‐ play.
bed here, adhere to local regulations. The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
The concept the function via iDrive in this case.
▷ Most functions that are displayed on the
Control Display can be operated with the Terminating the voice activation
voice activation system using spoken com‐ system
mands. The system prompts you to make
your entries. Briefly press the button on the steer‐
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
vehicle is stationary cannot be operated
using the voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone lo‐
Possible commands
cated in the area of the interior rearview Most menu items on the Control Display can
mirror. be voiced as commands.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's The available commands depend on the menu
Manual to use with the voice activation that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
system. play.
The functions of the main menu have short
commands.
Requirements Some list items, such as the phone book en‐
Via the Control Display, set a language that is tries, can also be selected via the voice activa‐
also supported by the voice activation system tion system. Say the list items exactly as they
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ are displayed on the list.
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 77. Having possible commands read aloud
You can have the system read possible com‐
mands aloud: ›Voice commands‹.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
25
At a glance Voice activation system
For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐

played, the commands for the settings are 6. Press the button on the steering
read out loud. wheel again to select a specific track.
7. ›Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
Executing functions using short
commands Via short commands
Functions on the main menu can be performed Playback of the CD can also be started using a
directly by means of short commands, usually short command.
irrespective of which menu item is currently
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output
selected, for instance ›Vehicle status‹.
if necessary.
List of short commands of the voice activation
system, refer to page 270. 2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Help dialog for the voice activation
3. ›C D drive Track ...‹ e.g., CD track 4.
system
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
Additional commands for the help dialog: Setting the voice dialog
▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the
You can set whether the system should use
current operating options and the most im‐
the standard dialog or a shorter version.
portant commands for them are an‐
nounced. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the
announcements from the system are issued in
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
an abbreviated form.
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced. On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
Example: playing back a CD
3. "Speech mode:"
Via the main menu 4. Select the setting.
The commands of the menu items are spoken
out loud, in the same way as they are selected
via the controller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output

if necessary.

wheel.
3. ›C D and multimedia‹
The medium last played is played back.
4. ›C D‹ Adjusting the volume
5. ›C D drive‹ Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
The CD is played back. structions until the desired volume is set.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
26
Voice activation system At a glance
▷ The volume remains constant even if the

volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐
trol currently in use.
Notes on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 255, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
27
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
This chapter describes all series equipment as refer to page 38.
The settings called up and implemented when
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re‐
mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, re‐
fer to Personal Profile.
special equipment or the country version. This
also applies to safety-related functions and In addition, information about service require‐
systems. ments is stored in the remote control, Service
data in the remote control, refer to page 245.
Integrated key
Remote control/key
Buttons on the remote control
Press button 1 and pull out the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:

▷ Driver's door, refer to page 34.
1 Unlocking New remote controls

2 Locking You can obtain new remote controls from your
3 Opening tailgate service center.
General information Loss of the remote controls

The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ Lost remote controls can be blocked by your
trols with keys. service center.
Each remote control contains a rechargeable

battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
Personal Profile
driven. Use each remote control at least twice
The concept
a year for longer road trips in order to maintain
the batteries' charge status. You can set several of your vehicle's functions
to suit your personal needs and preferences.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
30
Opening and closing Controls
▷ The settings are automatically saved in the ▷ Show visual warning for the Park Distance
profile currently activated in the remote Control PDC, refer to page 104.
control. ▷ rearview camera:
▷ The remote control used is detected when ▷ Function selection, refer to page 106.
the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐
▷ Type of display, refer to page 107.
file is called up.
▷ Light settings:
▷ Your personal settings will be recognized
and called up again even if the vehicle has ▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to
been used in the meantime by someone page 62.
else with another remote control. ▷ Welcome lamps, refer to page 83.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi‐ ▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer
mum of four remote controls. They are stored to page 84.
for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in ▷ Daytime running lights, refer to
use. page 84.
▷ High-beam Assistant, refer to
Personal Profile settings
page 85.
The following functions and settings can be
stored in a profile. ▷ Automatic climate control: AUTO program,
cooling function and automatic recircu‐
More information on the settings can be found lated air control activated/deactivated,
under: temperature, air flow rate and distribution,
▷ Assigning the programmable memory but‐ refer to page 108.
tons, refer to page 22. ▷ Navigation:
▷ Response of the central locking system ▷ Voice activation, refer to page 155.
when the car is being unlocked, refer to
page 32. ▷ Route criteria, refer to page 153.
▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to ▷ Map view settings, refer to page 157.
page 35. ▷ Entertainment:
▷ Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi‐ ▷ Tone control, refer to page 164.
tion after unlocking, refer to page 33. ▷ Radio, stored stations, refer to
▷ Settings for the display on the Control Dis‐ page 172.
play and in the instrument cluster: ▷ CD/multimedia, audio source listened
▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to to last, refer to page 174.
page 76. ▷ Telephone: volume, refer to page 200.
▷ Date format, refer to page 77.
▷ Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 78. Central locking system
▷ Language on the Control Display, refer
The concept
to page 77.
The central locking system becomes active
▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,
when the driver's door is closed.
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 75. The system simultaneously engages and re‐
leases the locks on the following:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
31
▷ Doors. Unlocking
▷ Tailgate. Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked.
▷ Fuel filler flap. The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and cour‐
tesy lamps are switched on.
Operating from the outside You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
▷ Via the remote control. The setting is stored for the remote control
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door currently in use.
handles on the driver's and front passen‐
ger sides. 1. "Settings"
The following takes place simultaneously 2. "Door locks"

when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐ 3. "Unlock button:"
mote control:
▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and
courtesy lamps are switched on and off.
▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed,
refer to page 39.
Operating from the inside

Via the button for the central locking system,
refer to page 35.
If the vehicle is locked from the inside, the fuel 4. Select the desired function:
filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ "All doors"
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the The entire vehicle is unlocked.
central locking system unlocks automatically. ▷ "Driver's door only"
The hazard warning system and interior lamps Only the driver's door and the fuel
come on. filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again
unlocks the entire vehicle.
Opening and closing: from Convenient opening

the outside Press and hold the button on the remote
control.
Using the remote control
The windows and the panoramic glass sunroof
open.
General information
Take the remote control with you Locking
People or animals left unattended in a Press the button on the remote con‐
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ trol.
side. Always take the remote control with you
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
can then be opened from the outside.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
32
Locking from the outside 3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
edge.◀
Switching on the interior lamps and

courtesy lamps
Press the button on the remote con‐
trol with the vehicle locked.
Panic mode Retrieving the seat and mirror settings

You can trigger the alarm system if you find The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
yourself in a dangerous situation. used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use.
Press the button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds. When the vehicle is being unlocked, these po‐
sitions are automatically retrieved if the setting
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
is activated.
Unlocking tailgate Pinch hazard when moving back the seat

Press the button on the remote control for If this function is used, first make sure
approx. 1 second and release. that the footwell behind the driver's seat is
empty. Failure to do so could cause injury to
The tailgate will open slightly, regardless of
persons or damage to objects behind the seat
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.
as a result of a rearward movement of the
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. seat.◀
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
before opening.
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed.
To avoid locking yourself out of the vehicle, do
not place the remote control into the cargo ▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐
area. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it ory is pressed.
is pushed closed.
Selecting automatic activation
Before and after each trip, check that the tail‐
gate has not been inadvertently unlocked. 1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
33
3. "Last seat position auto." Any unauthorized modifications or changes to

these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Using the door lock
General information
Malfunctions
Local radio waves may interfere with the re‐
mote control.
In this case, unlock and lock the car at the door
lock with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a re‐ Locking from the outside
mote control, the battery in the remote control Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
is discharged. Use the remote control during if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot
an extended drive in order to recharge the bat‐ be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐
tery, refer to page 30. The remote control for edge.◀
Comfort Access contains a battery that may
The alarm system, refer to page 39, is not
need to be replaced, refer to page 38.
deployed when the vehicle is locked with the
integrated key. The alarm system is triggered
For US owners only when the door is opened if the vehicle was un‐
The transmitter and receiver units comply with locked via the door lock.
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
To stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with the
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
remote control or insert the remote control into
erned by the following:
the ignition lock all the way.
FCC ID:
Only the driver's door can be locked via the
LX8766S door lock.
LX8766E
LX8CAS Locking the doors, the fuel filler flap,
and the tailgate all at once
Compliance statement:
To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC gate at once:
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: 1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ing the button for the central locking sys‐
ference, and tem in the interior, refer to page 35.
▷ this device must accept any interference 2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐
received, including interference that may senger door, refer to page 35.
cause undesired operation. 3. Lock the vehicle as follows:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
34
▷ Press down the lock button of the front The vehicle locks automatically after a
passenger door and close the door short period of time if a door is not
from the outside. opened.
▷ Lock the driver's door using the ▷ "Lock after start. to drive"
integrated key in the door lock. The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive away.
Manual operation
If an electrical malfunction occurs, unlock or
lock the driver's door using the integrated key
in the door lock. The other doors must be un‐
locked or locked from the inside.
Opening and closing: from

the inside
Unlocking and opening
▷ Press the button. The doors are
unlocked. To open, pull the door
handle above the armrest.
▷ Pull the door handle above the armrest
twice: the door is unlocked the first time
and opened the second time.
Locking
Locking and unlocking ▷ Press the button. The doors are
Press the button in the vehicle. locked.
▷ Press the lock button of a door. To prevent
The doors and the tailgate are locked or un‐ you from being locked out, the opened
locked when the front doors are closed, but driver's door cannot be locked using the
they are not secured against theft. lock button.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Take the remote control with you
People or animals left unattended in a
Automatic locking
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
The setting is stored for the remote control side. Always take the remote control with you
currently in use. when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
1. "Settings" can then be opened from the outside.◀
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
Tailgate
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
Opening
The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
35
Ensure that adequate clearance is available Opening manually

before opening. In case of an electrical malfunction:
Provide edge protection 1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, enlarge
Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear the cargo area, refer to page 119.
window while driving and damage the heating 2. From the cargo area, press out the handle
wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐ in the tailgate, see arrow, and pull out as far
tion.◀ as possible. The tailgate is unlocked.
Opening from the inside
3. Open the tailgate from the outside and

press in the handle.
Press the button. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is closed.
stationary, provided that the tailgate has not
been locked. Closing
Opening from the outside
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tail‐

gate can be used to conveniently pull down the
tailgate.
▷ Press the button next to the tailgate.
▷ Press the remote control button for ap‐ Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the
prox. 1 second and then release. cargo floor panel is not raised, refer to
page 121.
The tailgate opens slightly. It can be swung
upward. Keep the closing area clear
Make sure that the closing area of the
tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage
may result.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
36
Comfort Access This corresponds to pressing the button.
The concept Locking

The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is nearby or in the passenger
compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. Touch the area on the door handle, arrow 2,
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
This corresponds to pressing the but‐
▷ Starting the engine.
ton.
▷ Convenient closing.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
Functional requirement and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐
must be located outside of the vehicle. hicle.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not If a remote control is detected within the vehi‐
possible until after approx. 2 seconds. cle, the vehicle does not lock or is unlocked
again.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is inside the vehicle.
Convenient closing
Comparison with ordinary remote Press the area, arrow 2, with your finger and
control hold.
The functions can be controlled by pressing In addition, the windows and the panoramic
the buttons or via Comfort Access. glass sunroof close.
Monitor the closing process
Unlocking Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the hand
from the door handle immediately stops the
closing process.◀
Unlocking the tailgate separately

Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas‐ area is detected in the locked vehicle, the tail‐
senger door completely, arrow 1. gate opens again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
37
Ignition on you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the necessary, insert another remote control into
ignition on. the ignition switch.
When doing so, do not depress the brake The warning lamp in the instrument
pedal, otherwise the engine will start. cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no lon‐
Starting the engine ger inside the vehicle.
The engine can be started or the ignition can After switching off the engine, the engine can
be switched on when a remote control is inside only be started again within approx. 10 sec‐
the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a re‐ onds if no door has been opened.
mote control into the ignition lock, refer to
page 57. The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message ap‐
Switching off the engine in cars with pears on the Control Display: replace
automatic transmission the remote control battery.
The engine can only be switched off with
transmission position P engaged, refer to
Replacing the battery
page 59.
The remote control for Comfort Access con‐
To switch the engine off with transmission po‐
tains a battery that will need to be replaced
sition N engaged, insert the remote control in
from time to time.
the ignition lock.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
Malfunction control, refer to page 30.
The Comfort Access functions can be distur‐ 2. Remove the cover.
bed by local radio waves, such as by a mobile
phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote
control or when a mobile phone is being
charged in the vehicle.
If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using
the buttons on the remote control or use the
integrated key in the door lock.
Mechanical activation using the integrated key
only locks/unlocks the driver's door.
To start the engine afterward, insert the re‐ 3. Insert a new battery of the same type with
mote control into the ignition switch. the positive side facing upwards.
4. Press on the cover to close it.
Warning lamps
Return used battery to a recycling center
The warning lamp in the instrument or to your service center.
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started.
The remote control is not in the vehicle or has
a malfunction. Take the remote control with
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
38
Alarm system In some market-specific versions, the tailgate

can only be opened using the remote control if
The concept the vehicle was unlocked first.
The vehicle alarm system responds to:
Switching off the alarm
▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
▷ Movements in the vehicle: interior motion trol, refer to page 32.
sensor, refer to page 40.
▷ Insert the remote control all the way into
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ the ignition lock.
tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
▷ Interruptions in battery voltage. Indicator lamp on the interior rearview
The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: mirror
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
Arming and disarming the alarm

system
General information
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
2 seconds:
with the remote control or via Comfort Access,
the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the The system is armed.
same time. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed
Door lock and armed alarm system properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
The alarm system is triggered when the door is cured.
opened if the vehicle was unlocked via the The indicator lamp flashes continuously af‐
door lock. ter approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion
To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the sensor is not active.
remote control or switch on the ignition, if nec‐ ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
essary through emergency detection of the re‐ ing:
mote control.
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
Tailgate and armed alarm system ▷ If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
The tailgate can be opened using the remote
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
control, even if the alarm system is armed.
5 minutes:
Press the button on the remote control.
An alarm has been triggered.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again by the alarm system. The haz‐ Panic mode
ard warning system flashes once.
In dangerous situations, trigger the alarm sys‐
tem:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
39
Press the button on the remote control for

at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.
Interior motion sensor Opening

For the sensor to function properly, the win‐
dows and panoramic glass sunroof must be ▷ Press the switch to the resistance
closed. point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in ance point.
the following situations: The window opens automatically.
▷ In duplex garages. Pressing again stops the motion.
▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at
sea or on a trailer. Closing
▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle. Danger of pinching
Monitor the closing process and make
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and sure that the closing path of the window is
interior motion sensor clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds after the vehicle is locked.
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ point.
onds and then flashes continuously.
The window closes while the switch is
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ held.
sor remain switched off until the vehicle is
locked again. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically.
Power windows
Pressing the switch stops the motion.
General information Convenient operation via the remote control,
refer to page 32.
Take the remote control with you
Convenient operation via the door lock is not
Take the remote control with you when
supported.
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐ Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with
jure themselves.◀ Comfort Access.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
40
After the ignition is switched off switches in the rear passenger area, such as
When the remote control is removed or the ig‐ by children.
nition is switched off, the windows can con‐
tinue to be operated for approx. 1 minute as Press the button.
long as no door is opened. The LED lights up if the safety function is
switched on.
Pinch protection system
Safety switch for rear operation
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as
Press the safety switch when transport‐
a window closes, the closing action is inter‐
ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may
rupted.
result if the windows are closed without super‐
The window reopens slightly. vision.◀
Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check Panoramic glass sunroof
that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain General information
situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately using the
Do not use window accessories
switch.
Do not install any accessories in the
range of movement of the windows; otherwise, Danger of pinching
the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ Monitor the closing process and make
sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof
is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Closing without the pinch protection
system Take the remote control with you
For example, if there is an external danger or if Take the remote control with you when
ice on the windows prevents a window from leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐
closing normally, proceed as follows: ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point selves.◀
and hold it there.
Pinch protection is limited and the window
reopens slightly if the closing force ex‐
ceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without pinch protec‐
tion.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, the rear windows are
prevented from being opened or closed via the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
41
Tilting the glass sunroof The glass sunroof and sliding visor move to‐
gether. Pressing the switch again stops the
Press the switch briefly.
motion.
▷ The closed roof is tilted and
the sliding visor opens Convenient operation, refer to page 32, via the
slightly. remote control or the door lock.
▷ The opened roof closes until Convenient closing, refer to page 37, with
it is in its tilted position. The Comfort Access.
sliding visor stays com‐
pletely open. Comfort position
Pressing the switch again In the comfort position, the roof is not fully
closes the sliding visor al‐ open. This reduces wind noise in the passen‐
most completely. ger compartment.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or
Do not use force to close the sliding visor closed all the way, it stops in the comfort posi‐
Do not use force to close the sliding visor tion. If desired, continue the motion following
with the glass sunroof in its tilted position, oth‐ this with the switch.
erwise the mechanism will be damaged.◀
After the ignition is switched off
Opening/closing the sliding visor The roof can still be operated for approx. 1 mi‐
▷ Press the switch in the de‐ nute, as long as no door has been opened.
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there. Pinch protection system
The sliding visor moves If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐
while the switch is being roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐
held. ment is stopped, beginning at approximately
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction the tilted position during closing.
past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof opens again slightly.
The sliding visor moves automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐ Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐
tion. tection
Despite the pinch protection system, check
that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise,
Opening/closing the glass sunroof
the closing action may not be interrupted in
With the sliding visor open, proceed as descri‐ certain extreme situations, such as when thin
bed under Sliding visor. objects are present.◀
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

sliding visor together Closing without the pinch protection
system
Press the switch twice in the de‐
For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐
sired direction past the resist‐
ceed as follows:
ance point.
1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐
sistance point and hold.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
42
Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐

opens slightly if the closing force exceeds
a certain value.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the roof
closes without pinch protection.
Initialization after a power failure

After a power failure, it is only possible to raise
the roof, if necessary.
Have the system initialized by your service
center.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
43
Controls Adjusting
Adjusting
Vehicle equipment nate the protection normally provided by the
belt.◀
Adjusting manually
systems.
Sitting safely
Forward/backward
The ideal seating position can make a vital Pull lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. position.
The seating position plays an important role in After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐
an accident in combination with: ward or back slightly to make sure it engages
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 46. properly.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 47.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 88.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Seats
Backrest tilt
Note before adjusting
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat
while driving. The seat could respond with un‐
expected movement and the ensuing loss of
vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the

rear
Do not incline the backrest on the front pas‐ Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back‐
senger side too far to the rear during driving. rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Otherwise, there is the danger of sliding under
the safety belt in an accident. This would elimi‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
44
Adjusting Controls
Seat tilt
4 Backrest
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat The head restraint can be adjusted manually,
or lift it off, as necessary. refer Head restraints below.
Thigh support Lumbar support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for‐ You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
ward or back. to obtain additional support in the lumbar re‐
gion.
Adjusting electrically The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐
plementary support to help you maintain a re‐
laxed, upright sitting position.
▷ Increase or decrease curvature:
Press front or rear section of switch.
▷ Shift curvature up or down:
Press upper or lower section of switch.
1 Forward/backward
2 Height
3 Seat tilt
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
45
Controls Adjusting
Backrest width The LEDs go out.

The temperature is reduced, if need be, down
to no heat in order to reduce the load on the
battery. The LEDs remain lit.
Safety belts
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
The width of the backrest can be changed with worn by all occupants before driving away.
the side wings to adjust the side support to Although airbags enhance safety by providing
your own needs. added protection, they are not a substitute for
Press front or rear section of switch. safety belts.
The backrest width decreases or increases.
Seats with safety belt
Adjusting the rear seat backrests ▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
Adjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 119.
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
▷ The two rear safety belt buckles integrated
Seat heating into the rear seat are for passengers sitting
on the left and right.
▷ The belt buckle embossed with the word
CENTER is intended exclusively for use by
passengers riding in the center position.
▷ If the middle safety belt is used in the rear,
the left backrest must be locked, refer to
page 119; otherwise, the safety belt will
not have a restraining effect.
Notes
Switching on One person per safety belt
Press the button once for each tem‐ Never allow more than one person to
perature level. wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit. Putting on the belt
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐ across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
cally with the temperature set last. body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
low around the hips in the lap area and does
Switching off not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
Press the button longer. can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal
impact and injure the abdomen.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
46
Adjusting Controls
The safety belt must not lie across the neck, Damage to safety belts
rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid or In the case of strain caused by accidents or
breakable objects, or be pinched.◀ damage:
Reduction of restraining effect Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors
Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the
checked.
belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder
belt periodically to readjust the tension across Checking and replacing safety belts
your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the Have the work performed only by your
safety belt may be reduced.◀ service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured
that this safety feature will function properly.◀
Buckling the belt
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjusting the head restraint
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
creased risk of injury in an accident.◀
the belt buckle.
Height
Unbuckling the belt
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
1. Hold the belt firmly.
approx. at ear level.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its reel. Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
Safety belt reminder for the driver's is as close as possible to the back of the head.
and front passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a
signal sounds. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display.
Check whether the safety belt has
been fastened correctly.
The safety belt reminder is active at speeds

above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be ac‐
tivated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
senger seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
47
Controls Adjusting
Front Before transporting passengers

Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
Height adjustment porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Seat and mirror memory

General information
Two different driver's seat and exterior mirror
positions can be stored and retrieved.
▷ To raise: pull.
The adjustment of the backrest width and the
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and lumbar support is not stored in the memory.
push the head restraint down.
Storing
Rear
Height adjustment
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion, refer to page 57.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
▷ To raise: pull. desired positions.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down. 3. Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up.
The height of the middle head restraint cannot 4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
be adjusted. The LED goes out.
If the M button is pressed accidentally:
Removing at the front and rear
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Press the button again. The LED goes
sitting in the seat in question. out.
1. Pull upward as far as possible.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and completely
pull out the head restraint with the rear
seat backrest folded forward slightly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
48
Adjusting Controls
Calling up settings At a glance

Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving
Do not retrieve the memory setting while driv‐
ing, as an unexpected seat movement could
result in an accident.◀
Comfort function
1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or
switch on the radio ready state, refer to
1 Adjusting
page 57.
2 Fold in and out
2. Briefly press the desired memory but‐
ton 1 or 2. 3 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
The seat is automatically moved to the stored
position. Selecting a mirror
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is To change over to the other mirror:
pressed. Slide the mirror changeover switch.
Safety mode Adjusting electrically

1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni‐ The setting corresponds to the direc‐
tion on or off, refer to page 57. tion in which the button is pressed.
2. Press and hold the desired memory button
1 or 2 until the setting procedure is com‐
pleted.
Saving positions
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 48.
Mirrors Adjusting manually

If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,
Exterior mirrors press the edges of the mirror glass.
General information Automatic Curb Monitor

The mirror on the passenger side is more When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
curved than the driver's mirror. glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐
senger side. This improves your view of the
Estimating distances correctly
curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer ing, for example.
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you Activating
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk
of an accident.◀ 1. Slide the mirror changeover switch
to the driver's side mirror position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
49
Controls Adjusting
2. Shift into reverse or engage transmission Interior rearview mirror

position R.
Reducing the blinding effect
Deactivating
Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐
senger's side mirror position.
Fold in and out

Press button 2.
Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.
For example, this is advantageous
▷ In car washes.
From behind when driving at night: turn the
▷ In narrow streets. knob.
▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded
away manually.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ automatic dimming feature
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the
button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐
pending on the width of the vehicle.◀
Automatic heating
Depending on the external temperature, both Two photocells are used for control:
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when ▷ In the mirror glass, see arrow.
the engine is running or the ignition is ▷ On the back of the mirror.
switched on.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
50
Adjusting Controls
Steering wheel
General information
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back.
Do not use force to swing the lever back
up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐
aged.◀
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
Press the button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
51
Controls Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

Vehicle equipment Children on the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child restraint
fixing system on the front passenger seat,
make sure that the front and side airbags on
the front passenger side are deactivated. Auto‐
matic deactivation of front passenger airbags,
refer to page 89.
also applies to safety-related functions and Deactivating the front passenger airbags
systems. If a child restraint fixing system is used in
When using the features and systems descri‐ the front passenger seat, the front passenger
bed here, adhere to local regulations. airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
The right place for children straint fixing system.◀
Note
Children in the vehicle Installing child restraint
Do not leave children unattended in the fixing systems
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the Notes
doors.◀ Manufacturer's information for child re‐
straint fixing systems
Children should always be in the rear To select, mount and use child restraint fixing
Accident research shows that the safest place systems, observe the information provided by
for children is on the rear seat. the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐
tective effect can be impaired.◀
Transporting children in the rear
Transport children younger than
On the front passenger seat
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the rear only, using child restraint fixing sys‐ After installing a child restraint fixing system
tems suitable for the age, weight, and height of on the front passenger seat, ensure that the
the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk front and side airbags on the front passenger
of injury in an accident. side are deactivated.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a Deactivating the front passenger airbags
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint If a child restraint fixing system is used in
fixing system can no longer be used, due to the front passenger seat, the front passenger
their age, weight and size.◀ airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury to the child when
the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐
straint fixing system.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
52
Transporting children safely Controls
Seat position and height 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
Before installing a child restraint fixing system, pull it taut against the child restraint fixing
move the front passenger seat as far back as system. The safety belt is locked.
possible and adjust its height to the highest
position to obtain the best possible position for Unlocking the safety belt
the belt and to offer optimal protection in the 1. Open the belt buckle.
event of an accident. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
Do not change the seat position and height af‐ 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐
ter this. pletely.
Backrest width
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system LATCH child restraint fixing
on the front passenger seat, open the backrest
system
width, refer to page 46, completely. Do not
change the backrest width after this. LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Backrest width for the child seat
Before installing a child restraint fixing Note
system in the front passenger seat, the back‐
rest width must be opened completely. Do not Manufacturer's information for LATCH
change the adjustment after this; otherwise, child restraint fixing systems
the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀ To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
fixing systems, observe the operating and
safety information from the system manufac‐
Child seat security
turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be
reduced.◀
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐
The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the chors
front passenger can be locked to prevent ex‐ Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
tension in order to permit attachment of child properly engaged and that the child restraint
restraint fixing systems. fixing system is resting snugly against the
backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection
Locking the safety belt offered may be reduced.◀
1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
2. Secure the child restraint fixing system
with the belt.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
53
LATCH mounting eyes

Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐
per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re‐
straint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting
eyes could be damaged.◀
Retaining strap guide

Retaining strap
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are Make sure the upper retaining strap does
located behind the indicated cover caps. not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the
Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐ strap will not properly secure the child restraint
ing system, pull the belt away from the child fixing system in the event of an accident.◀
restraint fixing system.
Outer rear seats
Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐
fer to the operating instructions of the sys‐
tem.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint fixing system with a

tether strap
1 Direction of travel
Mounting points 2 Head restraint
3 Cargo area floor
4 Hook for upper retaining strap
5 Mounting point/eye
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper

retaining strap between the rear seat backrest
and the cargo cover.
There are three mounting points, see arrows,
for the upper retaining strap of LATCH child
restraint fixing systems.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
54
Transporting children safely Controls
Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the mounting point
On outer rear seats:
1. Slide the head restraint upward.

2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
Center rear seat 4. Pull the retaining strap taut.

On center rear seat:
1. Route the upper retaining strap over the

middle of the head restraint.
2. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the mounting eye.
3. Pull the retaining strap taut until it com‐
presses the cushion of the head restraint,
thus preventing the strap from sliding off.
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint Locking the doors and
3 Cargo area floor windows
4 Hook for upper retaining strap
Rear doors
5 Mounting point/eye
6 Backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
When using the cargo cover, pass the upper

retaining strap between the rear seat backrest
and the cargo cover.
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door if
children are being transported in the
rear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
55
This locks the rear window switches so that

the windows cannot be operated from the rear:
safety switch, refer to page 41.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
56
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle equipment Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
well as country-specific and special equipment Do not forcibly pull the remote control
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also out of the ignition lock
describes equipment that may not be found in Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected the ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
systems.
▷ The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You can only take out the remote control if
transmission position P is engaged: interlock.
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock Start/Stop button
Insert the remote control all the way into the Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
ignition lock. ignition on or off and starts the engine.
▷ Radio ready state is switched on. Individual The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed
electrical consumers can operate. when you press the Start/Stop button.
Comfort Access Radio ready state

If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, Individual electrical consumers can operate.
only insert the remote control into the ignition The time and the external temperature are dis‐
lock, refer to page 37, under special circum‐ played in the instrument cluster.
stances.
Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
▷ When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
57
Controls Driving
▷ In cars with Comfort Access, refer to Frequent starting in quick succession

page 37, by touching the surface above the Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting
door lock. the car and avoid starting the car frequently in
quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not
Ignition on burned or is inadequately burned, and there is
All electrical consumers can operate. The od‐ the danger of overheating and damaging the
ometer and trip odometer are displayed in the catalytic converter.◀
instrument cluster.
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
To save battery power when the engine is off, the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
electronic systems/power consumers.
Starting the engine
Radio ready state and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis‐
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Automatic transmission, 8-gear

In certain situations, transmission position P is
engaged automatically. To make it possible for
the vehicle to roll, such as in an automatic car
wash, follow the instructions in Car washes, re‐
fer to page 261.
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Starting the engine Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 37.
General information
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Enclosed areas
2. Engage transmission position P if neces‐
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
sary.
areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes
may lead to loss of consciousness and death. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, The ignition is activated automatically for a
an odorless and colorless but highly toxic certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
gas.◀ gine starts.
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the car unattended with the
engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐
tial source of danger.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
shift to neutral or engage transmission posi‐
tion P and set the parking brake firmly; other‐
wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
58
Driving Controls
Engine stop engine starts automatically when you wish to

drive away.
General information
Automatic operation
Take the remote control with you
The automatic engine Start/Stop function is
Take the remote control with you when operational after each engine start. It is acti‐
leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ vated whenever you drive forward faster than
ple, cannot operate the windows and injure 3 mph/5 km/h.
themselves.◀
Set the parking brake and further secure Automatic engine stop
the vehicle as required The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
erwise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward Automatic transmission:
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐
hicle, for example, by turning the steering tion D.
wheel in the direction of the curb.◀
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is at a standstill.
Before driving into a car wash ▷ The driver's safety belt is fastened or the
To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an driver's door is closed.
automatic car wash, follow the information on
When the engine is switched off, the air vol‐
Washing in automatic car washes, refer to
ume of the automatic climate control is re‐
page 261.
duced.
Switching off the engine Indicator light in the instrument

cluster
The indicator lamp lights up when the
1. Engage transmission position P with the
Auto Start/Stop function is ready to
vehicle stopped.
start the engine automatically.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake firmly. The indicator lamp lights up if the re‐
4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐ quirements for an automatic engine
tion lock, refer to page 57. stop are not fulfilled.
Note
Automatic Engine Start/Stop The engine is not switched off automatically in
Function the following situations:
▷ External temperature too low.
The concept
▷ High external temperature and operation of
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. the automatic climate control.
The system switches off the engine during a
▷ The interior is not yet heated or cooled as
stop, for instance in congestion or at traffic
much as desired.
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
59
Controls Driving
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ Safety mode

ature. The engine does not start by itself after it is
▷ Sharp steering angle or the steering wheel switched off automatically if any of the follow‐
is being turned. ing conditions are fulfilled:
▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unfastened or
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ the driver's door is open.
matic climate control is switched on. ▷ Hood was unlocked.
▷ Vehicle battery charge is very low. The indicator lamp lights up. A mes‐
▷ Hood is unlocked. sage appears on the Control Display.
▷ HDC is activated. The engine can only be started via
▷ Stop-and-go traffic. the Start/Stop button.
▷ The selector lever is in position N or M/S.

Note
The indicator lamp is lit.
Even if you do not wish to drive away, the stop‐
ped engine still starts automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Parking the vehicle during an
▷ The interior has heated up strongly with
automatic engine stop
the cooling function switched on.
The vehicle can be parked safely during an au‐
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
tomatic engine stop, such as when you wish to
leave the vehicle. ▷ The vehicle begins to roll.
▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
position is changed from D to N, R or M/S.
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated. ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission
position is changed from P to N, D, R or
Automatic transmission: transmission po‐
M/S.
sition P is engaged automatically.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
2. Set the parking brake.
matic climate control is switched on.
Start the engine as usual using the Start/Stop
▷ Vehicle battery charge is very low.
button.
▷ The interior has cooled down strongly with
Automatic engine start the heating switched on.
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ ▷ Low braking pressure, such as from de‐
lowing conditions to enable the driver to drive pressing the brake pedal a number of times
away: consecutively.
▷ Automatic transmission:
Preventing automatic engine stop
The brake pedal is released. with an automatic transmission
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
The concept
To permit the driver to drive away especially
quickly, such as at intersections, the automatic
engine stop can be actively prevented.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
60
Driving Controls
Preventing the engine stop using the matically.A message appears on the Control
brake pedal Display. It is possible to continue driving. Have
The engine stop can be actively prevented the system checked.
within one second after the vehicle comes to a
standstill.
▷ Depress the brake pedal briefly and force‐ Parking brake
fully immediately after the vehicle comes to
a standstill. The concept
▷ Then continue depressing the brake pedal The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐
with normal braking force. vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Activating/deactivating the system
manually Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp lights up and an
acoustic signal sounds when driving
away. The parking brake is still set.
Setting
The lever engages automatically.
Releasing
Press the button.

▷ LED lights up: the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ LED goes out: the Auto Start/Stop function Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the
is activated. lever.
Automatic deactivation Notes

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
Using the parking brake while driving
tion is deactivated automatically in the interest
of safety, for example if the driver's absence is If it should become necessary to use the
detected. parking brake while driving, do not pull the
parking brake too forcefully. Keep the button
Malfunction on the parking brake lever pressed at all times.
The indicator lamp lights up. The au‐ Excessive application of the parking brake can
tomatic engine start/stop function no block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of
longer switches of the engine auto‐ the vehicle.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
61
Controls Driving
To prevent corrosion and uneven brake action, Triple turn signal activation
lightly apply the parking brake from time to Press the lever to the resistance point.
time when coasting, traffic conditions permit‐
The turn signal flashes three times.
ting.
This function can be activated or deactivated:
The brake lights do not light up when the park‐
ing brake is pulled. 1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Turn signal, high beams,
headlamp flasher
Turn signal
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
While driving and when using the turn
signal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional
turn signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not
be in the appropriate position and will be diffi‐ The setting is stored for the remote control
cult to detect.◀ currently in use.
High beams, headlamp flasher
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To switch off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point. 1 High beams
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp 2 Headlamp flasher
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
When towing a trailer, the indicator lamp may
also signal the failure of a turn signal bulb on Washer/wiper system
the trailer.
Notes
Signaling a turn briefly
Do not switch on the wipers if frozen
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
Do not switch on the wipers if they are
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the
to flash.
wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor
may be damaged.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
62
Driving Controls
Do not use the wipers on a dry wind‐ The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
shield sition when released.
Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield; oth‐ ▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
erwise, the wiper blades may wear more rap‐ ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
idly or become damaged.◀ once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
At a glance
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the
time between wipes is controlled automatically
and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,
directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
1 Switching on wipers Activating intermittent wipe or the

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe rain sensor
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
the rain sensor
4 Cleaning the windshield and headlamps
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen‐
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ Press the button, arrow 3.
sition when released. The LED in the steering wheel stalk lights up
and a wiping cycle is started.
Normal wiper speed
Press up once.
Setting intermittent wipe or the
The system switches to operation in the inter‐ sensitivity of the rain sensor
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
Fast wiper speed

Deactivating intermittent wipe or the
Press up twice or press once beyond the re‐ rain sensor
sistance point.
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The system switches to normal speed when
The LED goes out.
the vehicle is stationary.
Switching off wipers or brief wipe

Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
63
Controls Driving
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes After the wipers are folded back down, the
Deactivate the rain sensor when passing washer/wiper system, refer to page 62, must
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, be reactivated.
damage could be caused by undesired wiper Fold the wipers back down
activation.◀
Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
Cleaning the windshield and wise, the wipers may become damaged when
headlamps they are switched on.◀
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
1. Switch on the ignition.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
move to their resting position and are
When the vehicle lighting system is switched ready for operation.
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals. Rear window wiper
Do not use the washer system at freezing
temperatures
Do not use the washers if there is any danger
that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐
erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this
reason, use antifreeze.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is
empty; otherwise, you could damage the
pump.◀
1 Intermittent wipe
Windshield washer nozzles When reverse gear is engaged, the system
The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐ switches to continuous operation.
tomatically while the engine is running or the 2 Cleaning the rear window
ignition is switched on.
The rear window wiper does not move if the
Fold-out position of the wipers lever is in position 1 before the ignition is
switched on.
Required when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for example. To switch on the rear window wiper:
1. Switch off the ignition. 1. Move the lever to its basic position.
2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the 2. Select the required position again.
wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐ Do not use the washing mechanisms
shield. when the washer fluid reservoir is empty
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point Do not use washing mechanisms when the
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly will damage the washer pump.◀
vertical position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
64
Driving Controls
Washer fluid Fill with a mixture of window washing concen‐

trate and tap water; if needed, add antifreeze
General information according to the manufacturer instructions.
Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain
Antifreeze for washer fluid
the correct mixing ratio.
Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
Do not fill in undiluted window washing con‐
injuries if used improperly.
centrate and antifreeze and do not fill in pure
Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐ water; this could damage the washer system.
tion.
Do not mix window washing concentrate from
Only keep it in the closed original container different manufacturers; this could cause the
and inaccessible to children. washer nozzles to clog.
Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is Automatic transmission with
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual Steptronic, 6-gear
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ can also be shifted manually using Steptronic,
tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Con‐ refer to page 66.
centrate or the equivalent.◀
Parking the vehicle
Washer fluid reservoir Secure the vehicle
Adding washer fluid Before leaving the vehicle with the en‐
gine running, move the selector lever to posi‐
Only add washer fluid when the engine is
tion P and set the handbrake; otherwise, the
cool, and then close the cover completely to
vehicle will begin moving.◀
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
hot engine parts.
Disengaging the remote control
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk
to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ To remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, first move the selector lever to position P
and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove
the remote control from the ignition lock, refer
to page 57.
Selector lever positions

P R N D M/S + –
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐

ervoir.
The recommended minimum filling quantity is
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
65
Controls Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster P Park

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
rear wheels are locked.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
Use in automatic car washes, for example. The
vehicle can roll.
The selector lever position is displayed and the
engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in D Drive, automatic position
manual mode. Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
ward gears are selected automatically.
Changing selector lever positions Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
▷ With the ignition switched on or the engine sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
running, the selector lever can be moved sition D.
out of position P.
▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on the Kickdown
brake before shifting out of P or N; other‐ Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock. performance. Press on the accelerator beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle position.
Press on the brake pedal until you
start driving
Sport program and manual mode M/S
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a driving position, maintain Activating the Sport program
pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.◀
Move the selector lever from position D toward

the left.
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag‐
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel
the lock, press the button on the front of the This position is recommended for a perform‐
selector lever, see arrow. ance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the Sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
66
Driving Controls
Activating the M/S manual mode

Move the selector lever from position D toward
the left.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle +.
ward. ▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle –.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐
ward. The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐
ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐ shift down if the engine speed is too high. The
ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐
shift down if the engine speed is too high. The ment panel, followed by the current gear.
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐
ment panel, followed by the current gear.
Overriding selector lever lock
Shifting gears using the shift paddles If the selector lever is locked in position P al‐
on the steering wheel though the ignition is switched on, the brake is
depressed, and the button on the selector
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both overridden:
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ When the shift paddles on the steering 1. Switch off the ignition.
wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐ 2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
matic mode, the transmission switches to 3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
manual mode. until the sleeve is inside out.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐
ate or shift gears for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane,
manual mode remains active.
4. Using the screwdriver from the tool kit, re‐

fer to page 247, press the red lever while
moving the selector lever to the desired
position with the button pressed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
67
Controls Driving
Automatic transmission with Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the
transmission position P is engaged; otherwise,
Steptronic, 8-gear the vehicle may begin to roll.
Transmission positions
Engaging transmission position
D Drive, automatic position ▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐
gaged if the engine is running and the
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐
brake pedal is pressed.
ward gears are available.
▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐
otherwise, the shift command will not be
sition D.
executed: shift lock.
Kickdown Press on the brake pedal until you start
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving driving
performance. Press on the accelerator beyond To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
the resistance point at the full throttle position. select a driving position, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Engaging transmission positions D, R,
N
N is Neutral
The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged after the engine is
switched off if the remote control remains in
the ignition lock. This function can be used in
an automatic car wash, refer to page 261, for
example. P is automatically engaged after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes.
P Park Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐

The drive wheels are blocked. rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary.
P is engaged automatically when the following When shifting out of P or into R, simultane‐
conditions are met: ously push the unlock button 1.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the en‐ The engaged transmission position is dis‐
gine is running, the safety belt is not fas‐ played on the selector lever.
tened and neither the brake pedal nor the After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
accelerator is activated. its center position.
▷ The engine is switched off unless N is en‐
gaged and the remote control is in the igni‐ Engaging transmission position P
tion lock.
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ The remote control is removed from the ig‐
nition lock.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
68
Driving Controls
The transmission only shifts up or down if the

rpm and vehicle speed are appropriate. If the
engine speed is too high, the transmission
does not shift down.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument panel, followed by the current gear.
Ending the Sport program/manual

mode
Press button P. Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Shifting gears using the shift paddles
Activating the Sport program on the steering wheel
The shifting paddles make it possible to
quickly change gears since both hands can re‐
main on the steering wheel.
▷ If the shift paddles on the steering wheel
are used to shift gears while in automatic
mode D, the transmission temporarily
switches to manual mode.
▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐
ate or shift gears for a certain amount of
Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐ time, the transmission switches back to
mission position D. automatic mode D.
The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐ With the transmission position M/S selected,
played in the instrument cluster. the manual mode remains active.
This position is recommended for a perform‐

ance-oriented driving style.
Activating manual mode

Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐
mission position D.
Push the selector lever forward or backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed. ▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not
ward. shift down if the engine speed is too high.
▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐ The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
ward. strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
69
Controls Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster
The transmission position is displayed and the

engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in
manual mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
70
Displays Controls
Displays
Vehicle equipment Units of measure
To set the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the ex‐
ternal temperature, refer to page 75.
describes equipment that may not be found in The setting is stored for the remote control
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected currently in use.
also applies to safety-related functions and Time, external temperature display
systems. Set the time, refer to page 75.
bed here, adhere to local regulations. External temperature warning
If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is
Odometer, external the increased danger of ice.
temperature display, clock Ice on roads
Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on
roads.
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady
roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐
ger of an accident.◀
Odometer and trip odometer

Resetting trip odometer:
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
2 External temperature display and clock
the instrument cluster.
3 Odometer and trip odometer
When the vehicle is parked
Knob in the instrument cluster If you still want to view the time, external tem‐
Press the knob. perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni‐
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
tion lock:
odometer is reset.
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time,
external temperature and odometer are
displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
71
Controls Displays
Tachometer Engine oil temperature
Never force the engine speed up into the red ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low tem‐
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel perature end. Drive at moderate engine
supply is interrupted to protect the engine. and vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating temperature: the pointer
is in the middle or in the right half of the
Coolant temperature temperature display.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high tem‐
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and perature end. Switch off the engine imme‐
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi‐ diately and allow it to cool down.
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis‐
play. If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes‐
Check the coolant level, refer to page 244. sage appears on the Control Display.
Check the oil level, refer to page 241.
Current fuel consumption

Fuel gauge
Displays the current fuel consumption. You

can check whether you are currently driving in The vehicle inclination may cause the display
an efficient and environmentally-friendly man‐ to vary.
ner. The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates
the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler flap.
Notes on refueling, refer to page 226.
Range
After the reserve range is reached:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
72
Displays Controls
▷ A message is briefly displayed on the Con‐ ▷ Current fuel consumption.

trol Display. ▷ No information.
▷ The remaining range is shown on the com‐ To set the corresponding units of measure, re‐
puter. fer to page 75.
▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such
as when corners are taken rapidly, engine Information in detail
functions are not ensured.
The message appears continuously below a Range
range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel.
Refuel promptly
It is calculated based on your driving style over
At the latest, refuel at a range below
the last 18 miles/30 km.
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Average speed
Periods in which the vehicle was parked and
the engine was switched off manually are not
Computer included in the average speed calculations.
Displaying information on the With the trip computer, refer to page 74, you
instrument panel can have the average speed displayed for an
additional distance.
To reset the average speed: press the button
on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec‐
onds.
Average fuel consumption

This is calculated for the period during which
the engine is running.
The average consumption is computed based
Press the computer button on the turn signal on the distance traveled since the last time the
lever. computer was reset.
You can have the average consumption for an‐
Information is displayed in the instrument clus‐ other trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
ter. Control Display below.
To reset the average consumption: press the
Overview of the information
button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn prox. 2 seconds.
signal lever displays the information on the in‐
strument cluster in the following order: Current fuel consumption
▷ Range. Displays the current fuel consumption. You
▷ ECO PRO bonus range. can check whether you are currently driving in
▷ Average speed. an efficient and environmentally-friendly man‐
ner.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
73
Controls Displays
Displays on the Control Display ▷ Trip distance.

Display the computer or trip computer on the Both displays show:
Control Display. ▷ Average fuel consumption and
1. "Vehicle Info" ▷ Average speed.
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
Resetting the values for average speed and
average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press

the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Displays on the "Onboard info": Resetting the trip computer

Resetting all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Settings and information
▷ Range. Operating concept

▷ Distance to destination. Certain settings and information can only be
called up when the ignition is switched on. A
▷ Estimated time of arrival if a destination number of settings cannot be made while driv‐
was entered in the navigation system, refer ing.
to page 144.
Displays on the "Trip computer":
1 Button for:
▷ Selecting the display.
▷ Departure time.
▷ Setting values.
▷ Trip duration.
2 Button for:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
74
Displays Controls
▷ Confirming the selected display or set Units of measure

values.
The units for fuel consumption, route/distance,
▷ Calling up computer information 73. temperature, and pressure can be changed.
Symbol Function 1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"
With the lights switched on:
Dimming instrument lighting,
refer to page 87
Calling up Check Control, refer

to page 80
3. Select the desired menu item.

Checking the engine oil level,
refer to page 241 4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the time, refer to

page 75 Clock
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster

Setting date, refer to
To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the
page 76
time format below.
1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up

or down repeatedly until the appropriate
Viewing service requirement symbol appears in the display, accompa‐
display, refer to page 78 nied by the time and the word "SET".
Exiting displays
The external temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
2. Press button 2.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
75
Controls Displays
3. Use button 1 to set the hours. 3. "Time:"

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via the iDrive

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
The main menu is displayed. are displayed, and then press the control‐
ler.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed, and then press the
controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format

1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
2. "Settings"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The time format is stored.
currently in use.
Date
Setting the time zone currently in use, Personal Profile, refer to
page 30.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date" Setting the date
3. "Time zone:"
In the instrument cluster
4. Select the desired time zone.
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
The time zone is stored.
to Setting the date format below.
Setting the time 1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
1. "Settings" or down repeatedly until the appropriate
2. "Time/Date"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
76
Displays Controls
symbol appears in the display, accompa‐ 3. "Format:"

nied by the date and the word "SET". 4. Select the desired format.
2. Press button 2. The date format is stored.

3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
5. Set the month and the year in the same Settings on the Control
way. Display
6. Press button 2.
Language
The system stores the new date.
Setting the language
Via the iDrive
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Language:"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format

1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date" 4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Setting the voice dialog

Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 26.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
77
Controls Displays
Brightness The current service requirements can be read

out from the remote control by the service
Setting the brightness specialist.
The brightness is automatically adapted to the For certain maintenance operations, you can
ambient lighting conditions. However, the ba‐ view the distance remaining or the due date for
sic setting can be adjusted. that operation in the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings" 1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.

2. "Control display" 2. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator
3. "Brightness" lever up or down repeatedly until the ap‐
propriate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "SERVICE
INFO".

is selected.
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individ‐
currently in use.
ual service items.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness control may not be clearly visible. Displays
Symbol Function
Service requirements
Service requirements
Engine oil
The remaining driving distance and the date of

the next scheduled service are displayed
briefly immediately after you start the engine
or switch on the ignition.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
78
Displays Controls
Symbol Function 3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and legally
Roadworthiness test
mandated inspections are displayed.
Additional information can be displayed on
each entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
Front brake pads To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
Rear brake pads Symbols Description
No service is currently re‐

quired.
The deadline for service or a

Brake fluid legally mandated inspection is
approaching.
The service deadline has al‐

ready passed.
The sequence of displayed service items may Entering dates

vary. First the data for the next maintenance Enter the dates for the required inspections.
are displayed.
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
set correctly, refer to page 76.
Detailed information on service
requirements 1. "Vehicle Info"
More information on the scope of service re‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
3. "Service required"
play.
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.

6. "Date:"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
79
Controls Displays
7. Create the settings. Indicator/warning lamps

8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjust‐
ment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
Automatic Service Request a variety of combinations and colors.
Data regarding the maintenance status or le‐
gally mandated inspections of the vehicle are Several of the lamps are checked for proper
automatically transmitted to your service cen‐ functioning and light up temporarily when the
ter before a service due date. engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
You can check when your service center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Check Control The symbol indicates that Check Control

messages have been stored. The Check Con‐
The concept trol messages can be displayed later.
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐ Text messages
tems monitored.
Text messages at the upper edge of the Con‐
A Check Control message consists of indicator trol Display in combination with a symbol in the
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster instrument cluster explain a Check Control
and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal message and the meaning of the indicator and
and text messages at the top of the Control warning lamps.
Display.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
a fault or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
80
Displays Controls
Symbols accompanied by the words "CHECK CON‐

The following functions can be selected within TROL".
the supplementary text message, depending
on the Check Control message.
▷ "Service request"
Contact the service partner.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages

2. Press button 2.
If there is no Check Control message, this
is indicated by "CHECK OK“. If a Check
Control message has been stored, the cor‐
responding lamp comes on. It is accompa‐
nied by a text message on the Control Dis‐
play.
3. Press button 1 to check for other mes‐
sages.
Press the computer button in the turn signal
4. Press button 2.
lever.
The display again shows the external tem‐
Some Check Control messages are displayed perature and the time.
until the malfunctions have been rectified.
They cannot be hidden. Displaying stored Check Control
If several malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ messages
sages are displayed consecutively. 1. "Vehicle Info"
They are marked with the symbol 2. "Vehicle status"
shown here. 3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,
they are stored and can be displayed again
Messages after trip completion
later. Special messages that were displayed during a
trip are displayed again after the ignition is
They are marked with the symbol switched off.
shown here.
Viewing stored Check Control Speed limit

messages
Entry of a speed limit which, when reached,
1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator should cause a Check Control message to be
lever up or down repeatedly until the ap‐ issued.
propriate symbol appears in the display,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
81
Controls Displays
Renewed warning if the vehicle speed drops

below the set speed limit once by at least
3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the

limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is

displayed.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as the

limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit

1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
82
Lamps Controls
Lamps
Vehicle equipment off automatically in the following switch set‐
tings:
0, ,
Parking lamps
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected Switch position : the vehicle lamps light
special equipment or the country version. This up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
also applies to safety-related functions and Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐
systems. riods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
When using the features and systems descri‐ charged and it would then be impossible to
bed here, adhere to local regulations. start the engine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to
At a glance page 85.
Low beams
Switch position with the ignition switched
on: the low beams light up.
Welcome lamps
When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in
position or : the parking and interior
lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐
1 Automatic headlamp control / Adaptive locked.
Light Control / High-beam Assistant / wel‐
come lamps / daytime running lights Activating/deactivating the welcome
lamps
2 Lamps off / daytime running lights
1. "Settings"
3 Parking lamps / daytime running lights
2. "Lighting"
4 Low beams/welcome lamps
3. "Welcome light"
5 Fog lamps
Parking lamps/low beams,

headlamp control
General information
If the driver's door is opened while the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is switched
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
83
Controls Lamps
The setting is stored for the remote control For example, the sensors are unable to detect
currently in use. fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you
should always switch on the lamps manually
Headlamp courtesy delay feature under these conditions.◀
The low beams stay lit for a short while after
the ignition is switched off, if the lamps are Daytime running lights
switched off and the headlamp flasher is The daytime running lights light up in posi‐
switched on. tion 0, and . After the ignition is
switched off, the parking lamps light up in po‐
Setting the duration sition .
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting" Activating/deactivating
3. "Pathway light.: s" In some countries, driving with daytime run‐
ning lights is mandatory; for this reason, day‐
time running lights cannot be deactivated in
these cases.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
4. Set the duration.

currently in use.
Automatic headlamp control

Switch position : the low beams are
switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐ The setting is stored for the remote control
nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The currently in use.
LED next to the symbol lights up.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on. Adaptive Light Control
The low beams remain switched on independ‐
ent of the ambient lighting conditions when The concept
you switch on the front fog lamps. Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
Personal responsibility control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
ment in determining when the lamps should be rameters, the light from the headlamp follows
switched on in response to ambient lighting the course of the road.
conditions. In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during
turning, up to a certain speed one of the two
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
84
Lamps Controls
front fog lamps is switched on as a turning Left and right roadside parking lamps
lamp. This provides improved illumination of The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
the area inside the curve.
Switching on
Controls
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point for ap‐
Activating
prox. 2 seconds, arrow 3.
Switch position with the ignition switched
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery.
on.
Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly
The turning lamps are automatically switched long periods of time; otherwise, the battery
on depending on the steering angle or the use might not have enough power to start the en‐
of turn signals. gine.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ Switching off
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps to the pressure point, arrow 3.
are active.
Malfunction High-beam Assistant

The warning lamp lights up.A mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display. The concept
Adaptive Light Control is malfunc‐ When the lights are switched on, this system
tioning or has failed. Have the system checked automatically switches the high beams on and
as soon as possible. off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
sistant ensures that the high beams are
switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐
High beams/roadside lows. The driver can intervene at any time and
parking lamps switch the high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the High-beam Assistant

1. Turn the light switch to .
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn indicator lever in the direc‐
tion of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. The high beams are
switched on and off automatically.
1 High beams
The system responds to light from oncoming
2 Headlamp flasher traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
3 Roadside parking lamps adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
85
Controls Lamps
Switching the high beams on and off The system is not fully functional in situations
manually such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. coming traffic on freeways.
▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, briefly
▷ At low speeds.
push the turn indicator lever toward the high
beams. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
Activating/deactivating via iDrive ered with stickers, etc.
1. "Settings" ▷ If the sensor view field is dirty.
2. "Lighting" The view field of the sensor is located on
the front of the interior rearview mirror.
3. "High beam assistant"
Do not cover this area with stickers, etc.
Clean the sensor view field with a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
The setting is stored for the remote control The low beams must be switched on.
currently in use. Press the button. The green indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights
System limits up.
Personal responsibility If the automatic headlamp control, refer to
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve page 84, is activated, the low beams will come
as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐ on automatically when you switch on the fog
ment of when to use the high beams. There‐ lamps.
fore, manually switch off the high beams in sit‐
uations where this is required to avoid a safety
risk.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
86
Lamps Controls
Instrument lighting To avoid draining the battery, all lights inside

the car are switched off about 8 minutes after
The parking lamps or low beams must be the ignition is switched off, Start/Stop button,
switched on to adjust the brightness. refer to page 57.
1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis‐
play, accompanied by the brightness set‐
ting and the word "SET".
Switching the interior lights on and off

Press the button.
2. Press button 2. To switch off permanently: press the button for

3. Push button 1 up or down to select the de‐ approx. 3 seconds.
sired brightness level. To clear this setting: briefly press the button.
Reading lights
Press the button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear

next to the interior lights.
Danger of burns
Do not reach into the opening of the
4. Press button 2. lamps; otherwise, there is a risk of burns.◀
The display again shows the external tem‐

perature and the time. Ambient lighting
Depending on the equipment, the interior light‐
ing can be set individually for some lights.
Interior lights
Selecting the color scheme
General information 1. "Settings"
The interior lights, footwell lights, cargo area 2. "Lighting"
lights, and courtesy lights are controlled auto‐ 3. "Ambient:"
matically.
4. Select the desired setting.
The LEDs for the courtesy lights are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
87
Controls Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbags 3 Side airbags

2 Head airbags 4 Knee airbag
Front airbags Head airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in the head.
which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐
quate restraint. Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
Side airbags impact.
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
88
Safety Controls
Protective action ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end This also applies to steering wheel covers,
collisions. the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars
and the sides of the headliner.◀
Information on how to ensure the optimal
Even when all instructions are followed closely,
protective effect of the airbags
injury from contact with the airbags cannot be
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ruled out in certain situations.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at short-term and, in most cases, temporary
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
keep the danger of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐ In the case of a malfunction, deactivation
gered. and after triggering of the airbags
▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐ Do not touch the individual components imme‐
jects between an airbag and a person. diately after the system has been triggered;
otherwise, there is the danger of burns.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the
your service center or a workshop that has the
front passenger side clear, i.e., do not
necessary authorization for handling explo‐
cover with adhesive labels or coverings,
sives.
and do not attach holders or cables such
as for navigation instruments and mobile Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
phones. tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
undesired triggering of the airbag, either of
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
which could result in injury.◀
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries Warnings and information on the airbags are
can occur if the front airbag is triggered. also found on the sun visors.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat Automatic deactivation of the front
that are not approved specifically for seats passenger airbags
with integrated side airbags. The system determines whether the front pas‐
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐
jackets, over the backrests. sistance of the human body.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads The front and side airbags on the front passen‐
away from the side airbag and do not rest ger side are activated or deactivated accord‐
against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries ingly by the system.
can occur if the airbags are triggered. The indicator lamp above the interior rearview
▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. mirror shows the current status of the front
passenger airbags, deactivated or activated,
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.
refer to Front passenger airbag indicator lamp
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ below.
bag cover panels, cover them or modify
them in any way.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
89
Controls Safety
Leave feet in the footwell Indicator lamp for the front passenger
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
the front passenger airbags may not function
properly.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front

passenger seat
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions under Children on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to page 52.◀
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags indicates the operating state of the front
Malfunction of the automatic passenger airbags.
deactivation system
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐
When transporting older children and adults, tivated or deactivated.
the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
vated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
when a child who is properly
the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
seated in a child restraint fix‐
bags lights up.
ing system intended for that
In this case, change the sitting position so that purpose is detected on the
the front passenger airbags are activated and seat or the seat is empty.
the indicator lamp goes out. The airbags on the front
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have passenger side are not acti‐
the person sit in the rear. vated.
To make sure that occupation of the seat ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
cushion can be detected correctly: for example, a correctly seated person of
▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
padding, ball mats or other items to the airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐
passenger seat unless they are specifically tivated.
recommended by BMW. Most child seats are detected by the system,
▷ Do not place electronic devices on the pas‐ Especially the child seats required by NHTSA
senger seat if a child restraint fixing system at the time that the vehicle was manufactured.
is mounted on the seat. After installing a child seat, make sure that the
indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
lights up. This indicates that the child seat has
could press against the seat from below.
been detected and the front passenger airbags
are not activated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
90
Safety Controls
Operational readiness of airbag Functional requirements

system The system must have been initialized when
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.
System limits
Sudden tire damage
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
When the ignition is switched on,, refer external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐
to page 58, the warning lamp comes on vance.◀
briefly to indicate that the entire airbag
A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires
system and the belt tensioners are operational.
cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire
inflation pressure regularly.
Airbag system malfunction The system could be delayed or malfunction in
▷ The warning lamp does not light up after the following situations:
the ignition is switched on. ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ Warning lamp remains permanently on. ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
Have the airbag system checked without surface.
delay if there is a malfunction ▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive
In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐ wheels, high lateral acceleration.
tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise, ▷ When driving with snow chains.
there is the risk that the system will not func‐
tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe Status display
accident occurs.◀
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
whether or not the FTM is active.
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 1. "Vehicle Info"
The concept 2. "Vehicle status"
The system does not measure the actual infla‐ 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
tion pressure in the tires. The status is displayed.
It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing
the rotational speeds of the individual wheels Initialization
while moving. The initialization process adopts the set infla‐
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter tion tire pressures as reference values for the
and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐ detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
sponding wheel change. This is detected and confirming the inflation pressures.
reported as a flat tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
91
Controls Safety
Do not initialize the system when driving with Continued driving with a flat tire
snow chains. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. "Vehicle Info" 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
2. "Vehicle status" vers.
3. "Reset" 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
5. Start the initialization with "Reset". pressure in all four tires.
6. Drive away. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
The initialization is completed while driving,
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
which can be interrupted at any time.
the system.
The initialization automatically continues when
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
driving resumes.
tire inflation pressure:
Indication of a flat tire The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
The warning lamp lights up red. A and the driving style and conditions.
message appears on the Control Dis‐
For a vehicle containing an average load, the
play. In addition, a signal sounds.
possible driving distance is ap‐
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation prox. 50 miles/80 km.
pressure. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
sudden braking and steering maneuvers. duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance, and altered self-steering
Do not continue driving without run-flat properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
tires ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.
equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving Because the possible driving distance de‐
may result in serious accidents.◀ pends on how the vehicle is used during the
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
bility Control is switched on if necessary. greater depending on the driving speed, road
conditions, external temperature, cargo load,
Actions in the event of a flat tire etc.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Run-flat tires
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
You can continue driving with a damaged tire
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
duced lane stability during braking, a longer
braking distance and altered self-steering
properties.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
92
Safety Controls
Final tire failure Status indicator on the Control

Vibrations or loud noises while driving Display
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce The tire and system status is indicated by the
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire color of the tires.
could come loose and cause an accident. Do A change in the tire inflation pressure during
not continue driving, and contact your service driving is taken into account.
center.◀
All wheels are green
The system is active and issues warnings in
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM case of deviations from the tire inflation pres‐
sures stored last.
The concept "TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
The system monitors the tire pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system issues a warn‐ One wheel is yellow
ing if there is a significant loss of pressure in
Flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
one or more tires. Sensors in the tire valves
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
measure the tire pressure.
Control Display.
Notes All wheels are yellow

Tire damage caused by external influen‐ ▷ Flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure
ces in several tires.
Sudden tire damage caused by external influ‐ ▷ The system was not reset after a wheel
ences cannot be indicated in advance.◀ change and issues warnings when the tire
To operate the system, also note the additional pressure deviates from the tire inflation
information and instructions contained under pressures stored last.
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 230. ▷ A flat tire in one or more tires while the sys‐
tem is being reset.
Functional requirements A message appears on the Control Display.
The system must have been reset while the in‐
flation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable The wheels are gray
signaling of pressure loss is not ensured. The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reset the system after adjusting the tire infla‐ Possible reasons for this:
tion pressure and after changing a tire or
▷ TPM is being reset.
wheel.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
the same radio frequency.
ensure that the system will operate properly.
▷ Malfunction.
Status display
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "TPM"
The status is displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
93
Controls Safety
Resetting the system Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
Reset the system after adjusting the tire infla‐ sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
tion pressure and every time a tire or wheel is Do not continue driving without run-flat
changed. tires
1. "Vehicle Info" Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
2. "Vehicle status" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
may result in serious accidents.◀
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine, but do not start driving. When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on if necessary.
5. Start the system reset with "Reset".
6. Drive away. Actions in the event of a flat tire
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed. Run-flat tires
After a short trip at over 30 km/h, the set tire
Maximum speed
inflation pressures are adopted as target val‐
ues. The system reset is completed as you You can continue driving with a damaged tire
drive, and can be interrupted at any time. at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When driving resumes, the reset is continued
automatically. On the Control Display, the tires Continued driving with a flat tire
are shown in green and "TPM active" is dis‐ If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
played again.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When vers.
driving resumes, the reset is continued auto‐
matically. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is re‐ 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
setting, all tires on the Control Display are dis‐ the next opportunity.
played in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
shown. is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. Reset the system.
Low tire pressure message Possible driving distance with complete loss of
The small warning light lights up yel‐ tire inflation pressure:
low and the large warning light lights The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
up red. A message appears on the inflation pressure depends on the cargo load
Control Display. In addition, a signal and the driving style and conditions.
sounds. For a vehicle containing an average load, the
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐ possible driving distance is ap‐
flation pressure. prox. 50 miles/80 km.
▷ The system was not reset. The system When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,
therefore issues warnings in case of devia‐ its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐
tions from the tire inflation pressures duced lane stability during braking, a longer
stored last. braking distance, and altered self-steering
properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
94
Safety Controls
ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ decreases when the tire temperature drops. In
ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc. case of severe temperature drops, this behav‐
Because the possible driving distance de‐ ior may lead to a warning on account of the de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the fined warning limits.
trip, the actual distance may be smaller or
greater depending on the driving speed, road Malfunction
conditions, external temperature, cargo load, The small warning light flashes in yel‐
etc. low and then lights up continuously;
Continued driving with a flat tire the larger warning light comes on in
yellow. On the Control Display, the
Drive moderately and do not exceed a
tires are shown in gray and a message ap‐
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
pears. No flat tire can be detected.
A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a
change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ Display in the following situations:
duced lane stability during braking, a longer ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
braking distance and altered self-steering have the service center check it if neces‐
properties.◀ sary.
Final tire failure ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by

your service center.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce ▷ TPM could not be fully reset. Reset the
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire system again.
could come loose and cause an accident. Do The small warning light flashes in yel‐
not continue driving, and contact your service low and then lights up continuously;
center.◀ the larger warning light comes on in
yellow. On the Control Display, the
Message when the system was not tires are shown in gray and a message ap‐
reset pears. No flat tire can be detected.
The yellow warning light lights up. A Display in the following situations:
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with
The system may not have been reset
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
although a wheel was changed.
area of the disturbance, the system auto‐
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the matically becomes active again.
system, refer to page 94.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
System limits FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g., it may identify a tire as flat Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
in spite of the fact that the tire is filled to the should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
correct inflation pressure. flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
The tire pressure depends on the temperature
placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your
of the tire. An increase in the tire temperature,
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
e.g., while driving or due to sunlight, increases
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
95
Controls Safety
pressure label, you should determine the Brake force display

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has The concept
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the ▷ During normal brake application, the outer
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. brake lamps light up.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv‐ brake lamps light up in addition.
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres‐
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the mal‐
function indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the in‐
stallation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en‐
sure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
96
Driving stability control systems Controls
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment Dynamic Stability Control
This chapter describes all series equipment as DSC
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also The concept
describes equipment that may not be found in DSC prevents traction loss in the driving
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected wheels when driving away and accelerating.
special equipment or the country version. This DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
also applies to safety-related functions and tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐
systems. ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the
When using the features and systems descri‐ vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine
bed here, adhere to local regulations. speed and by applying brakes to the individual
wheels.
Adjust your driving style to the situation
Antilock Brake System ABS An appropriate driving style is always the
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during responsibility of the driver.
braking. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even
The vehicle remains steerable even during full with DSC.
brake applications, thus increasing active Do not reduce the additional safety margin
safety. with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ a risk of an accident.◀
gine.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
Electronic brake-force reduced during acceleration and when driving
distribution in bends.
The system controls the brake pressure in the To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior. again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost. It thus helps to achieve the short‐
est possible braking distance during full brak‐
ing. This system utilizes all of the benefits pro‐
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
97
Controls Driving stability control systems
Press and hold the button, but not lon‐ Dynamic Traction Control
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC lights up in the instru‐
DTC
ment cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. DTC
The concept
Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deacti‐
vated together. The DTC system is a version of the DSC in
which forward momentum is optimized.
In the interest of better forward momentum, The system ensures maximum forward mo‐
brake intervention is performed in the manner mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐
of a differential lock when the drive wheels spin lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐
quickly even if DSC is deactivated. ited.
It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐
Activating DSC
ate caution.
Press the button. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
DSC OFF and the indicator lamp in the under the following special circumstances:
instrument cluster go out. ▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road
For better control surfaces
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ ▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off
trols the drive forces and brake forces. in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and ▷ When driving with snow chains.
DTC has failed.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
DSC deactivated: Traction Control
The indicator lamp lights up and Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DSC OFF appears in the instrument provides maximum traction on loose ground.
cluster. Driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in bends.
Activating DTC
DSC and DTC deactivated.
Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for
DSC OFF lights up.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
98
Driving stability control systems Controls
Deactivating DTC the front and rear axle depending on the driv‐
ing situation and prevailing road conditions.
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster go out.
Hill Descent Control HDC
For better control The concept
The indicator lamp flashes: DTC con‐ HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
trols the drive forces and brake forces. matically controls vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients. Without requiring brake ap‐
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
plication, the vehicle moves at slightly more
DTC has failed.
than twice walking speed.
DTC activated: You can activate the Hill Descent Control at
speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
The indicator lamp lights up and
driving downhill at below approx.
TRACTION appears in the instrument
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces its speed
cluster.
to approx. twice walking speed and keeps it
constant.
While you are actively braking, the system is
on standby. The system does not brake the
vehicle during this time.
Increasing or reducing speed

The speed can be changed in the range from
roughly twice walking speed to approx.
15 mph/25 km/h by pressing the accelerator or
DTC is activated. brake pedal lightly.
A target speed within the same range can be
specified using the lever of the cruise control.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
your vehicle. To enhance performance during
sporty driving, the rear wheel on the inside of
the curve is braked while the resulting braking
effect is largely compensated by engine inter‐
vention.
xDrive 1 Increasing speed

xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ 2 Decreasing speed
hicle. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driv‐
ing characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
99
Controls Driving stability control systems
Activating HDC Drive-off assistant

This system supports driving away on gradi‐
ents. The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive away
without delay.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
roll back slightly.
Press the button; the LED above the
Driving off without delay
button lights up.
After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
automatically. will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin
Deactivating HDC rolling back.◀
Press the button again; the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h. Servotronic
The concept
Using HDC
The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
HDC can be used in every driving position.
quired to turn the wheels depending on the
speed at which you are driving.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Power steering provides strong support at low
speeds, which means that less effort is needed
to turn the wheels. Power steering support
lessens as your speed increases.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up.A mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Servotronic is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
1 Display for target speed possible.
2 HDC display
Malfunction
If the HDC display goes out during HDC opera‐
tion or is not displayed: HDC is not available
due to high brake temperatures or DSC has
failed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
100
Driving comfort Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment One lever for all functions

systems.
bed here, adhere to local regulations. 1 Storing and maintaining speed or acceler‐
ating
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler‐
Cruise control ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
The concept
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
The system is functional at speeds beginning
at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Maintaining current speed
The speed specified using the lever on the
steering column is maintained. Push, arrow 1, or pull, arrow 2, the lever to the
resistance point.
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
gine braking action is insufficient. The car's current speed is stored and main‐
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
Do not use cruise control briefly in the instrument cluster.
Do not use the system if unfavorable On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ maintain the set speed if current engine power
stant speed, for instance: output is insufficient. If the engine braking ef‐
▷ On curvy roads. fect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys‐
▷ In heavy traffic. tem will brake the vehicle slightly.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

Increasing desired speed
on a loose road surface.
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
cle and cause an accident.◀ speed is reached.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed to the point
of resistance, the desired speed increases
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is in‐
creased by up to 5 mph/10 km/h.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
101
Controls Driving comfort
The system stores and maintains the speed. pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerating slightly: Warning lamp
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, The warning lamp comes on when
until the desired speed is reached. cruise control has been deactivated
Accelerating significantly: as a result of DSC intervention, for
example. A message appears on the Control
Press the lever beyond the resistance point, Display.
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
maintains the speed. Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored
speed is resumed and maintained.
Decreasing speed In the following cases, the stored speed value
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance is deleted and cannot be called up again:
point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired ▷ When driving stability control systems in‐
speed is displayed. tervene.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled to the resist‐ ▷ When selector lever position N is engaged
ance point, the desired speed is decreased or transmission position D is disengaged.
by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ When the ignition is switched off.
▷ Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is re‐ Displays in the instrument cluster
duced by up to 5 mph/10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph/30 km/h is ach‐
ieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control

Push the lever upwards or downwards, ar‐
row 3.
The displays in the speedometer go out.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti‐ 1 Stored speed
vated when: 2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
▷ The brakes are applied.
If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears
▷ Selector lever position N is engaged or briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op‐
transmission position D is disengaged. erate the system.
▷ When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti‐ Call up Check Control messages, refer to
vated. page 81.
▷ When DSC or ABS is intervening.
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
102
Malfunction Avoid driving quickly with PDC

The warning lamp lights up. The sys‐ Avoid approaching an object quickly.
tem is malfunctioning or has failed. Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet
A message appears on the Control active.
Display. More information, refer to page 80. For technical reasons, the system may other‐
wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
Park Distance Control PDC Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects can reach the physi‐
The concept cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, for in‐
In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, stance:
the backup camera, refer to page 105, can be ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches.
switched on. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
PDC supports you when parking. A slow ap‐ ▷ With low objects.
proach to an object in front of or behind your
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
vehicle is announced by:
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
▷ Signal tones.
move into the blind area of the sensors before
▷ Visual display. or after a continuous tone sounds.
High, protruding objects such as ledges may
Measurement
not be detected.
Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐
sors in the bumpers. False warnings
The range is approx. 6 ft/2 m. PDC may issue a warning under the following
An acoustic warning is first given: conditions even though there is no obstacle
▷ By the front sensors and two rear corner within the detection range:
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. ▷ In heavy rain.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in
5 ft/1.50 m. ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
System limits
▷ On rough road surfaces.
Check the traffic situation as well
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐ rages.
tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
▷ In heavy exhaust.
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
dent could result from road users or objects ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
located outside of the PDC detection range. sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐
cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's
signal tone.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
103
Switching on automatically ▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that

With the engine running or the ignition is detected by only one of the corner sen‐
switched on, shift the selector lever into posi‐ sors.
tion R. ▷ If moving parallel to a wall.
The signal tone is switched off:
Switching off automatically when
▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐
driving forward
ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
The system switches off when a certain dis‐
▷ When transmission position P is engaged.
tance or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary. Volume
You can set the volume of the PDC signal tone,
Switching on/off manually
refer to page 165.
currently in use.
Visual warning
The approach to an object can be shown on
the Control Display. Objects that are farther
away are displayed on the Control Display be‐
fore a signal tone sounds.
Press the button.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
tone is sounded that indicates the position of
the object. For example, if an object is de‐ The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
tected behind the vehicle, a signal tone sounds vated.
from the rear speakers.
If the last image selected was the rearview
The shorter the distance to the object be‐
camera, this is displayed again. To switch to
comes, the shorter the intervals.
PDC:
If the distance to a detected object is less than
"Switch off rear view camera"
approx. 12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded. The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
If objects are located both in front of and be‐
hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐
nal is sounded.
The intermittent tone is interrupted after ap‐
prox. 3 seconds:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
104
Image on the Control Display System limits

Check the traffic situation as well
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive Check the traffic situation around the ve‐
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐
With PDC activated:
dent could result from road users or objects lo‐
"Rear view camera" cated outside the picture area of the backup
The image of the rear view camera is dis‐ camera.◀
played. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use. Detection of objects
High, protruding objects such as ledges
Malfunction may not be detected by the backup camera.◀
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition
switched on, shift the selector lever into posi‐
tion R.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed
when the system has been switched on using
iDrive.
A Check Control message, refer to page 80, is Switching off automatically when
displayed in the instrument cluster. driving forward
The system switches off when a certain dis‐
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle ap‐
tance or speed is exceeded.
pear in shaded form on the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked. Switch on the system again if necessary.
To ensure full operability:

Switching on/off manually
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Rear view camera

The concept
The rear view camera assists you when park‐ Press the button.
ing and maneuvering in reverse. To accom‐
plish this, the region behind your vehicle is
shown on the Control Display. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
If PDC is displayed, switch on the backup cam‐
era via the iDrive, refer to page 105.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
105
Assistance functions ▷ When the steering wheel is turned, only

one turning line is displayed.
Functional requirement
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer
▷ Rear view camera is switched on.
to page 107.
▷ Tailgate is completely closed.
Parking using pathway and turning
Pathway lines lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning
lines lead into the margins of the parking
space.
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear

view camera when the transmission is in
reverse.
▷ Help estimate the required amount of 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
space when parking and maneuvering on a the pathway line covers the corresponding
flat road surface. turning circle line.
▷ Depend on the current steering angle and
are continuously adapted to movements of
the steering wheel.
Show the parking aid lines via the iDrive, refer

to page 107.
Turning lines
▷ Can be displayed in the image of the rear

view camera.
▷ Show the path of the smallest turning cir‐
cle on a flat road surface.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
106
Obstacle marking Brightness

With the rear view camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.

is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rear view camera switched on:

▷ Three-dimensionally shaped markings can 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
be displayed in the image of the rear view is reached and press the controller.
camera.
Their color gradation corresponds to the mark‐ Camera

ings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance
to the object pictured.
Show the obstacle marking via the iDrive, refer
to page 107.
Activating assistance functions

Several assistance functions can be active at
the same time.
Showing the parking aid lines The lens of the rearview camera is under the
"Parking aid lines" grasping lip of the tailgate.
Pathway and turning lines are displayed. The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.
Showing the obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are dis‐
played.
Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera

using iDrive
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The image of the rear view camera is dis‐
played. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
107
Controls Climate
Climate
Automatic climate control
1 Manual air distribution 9 Temperature, right

2 Maximum cooling 10 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐
3 Temperature, left sation
4 AUTO program 11 Switching cooling function on/off manually
5 Manual air flow rate, AUTO intensity 12 Rear window defroster
6 Display 13 Seat heating, right 46
7 Automatic recirculated air control/recircu‐ 14 Interior temperature sensor, please keep

lated air mode clear
8 ALL program 15 Seat heating, left 46
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
108
Climate Controls
Note Maximum heating power can be obtained with

the highest setting, regardless of the external
Sufficient ventilation
temperature.
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
At the lowest setting, cooling is continuous, re‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
gardless of the external temperature.
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
the interior continuously worsens.◀
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
Comfortable interior climate The system is set to the lowest tem‐
For almost all conditions, the AUTO program perature, maximum air volume and recircu‐
4 offers the optimum air distribution and air lated-air mode.
flow rate, refer to AUTO program below. Select
Air flows out of the vents for the upper body
a comfortable interior temperature only.
region. Open them for this purpose.
The following sections contain more detailed
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
information on the available setting options.
▷ At an external temperature of approx.
Most of these settings are stored for the re‐
32 ℉/0 ℃.
mote control currently in use, Personal Profile
settings, refer to page 31. ▷ When the engine is running.
Manual air distribution AUTO program

Press the buttons repeatedly to select a pro‐ Press the button.
gram: Air volume, air distribution, and tem‐
▷ Windows. perature are controlled automatically.
Depending on the selected temperature,

▷ Upper body region.
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the windshield, side windows,
▷ Footwell. upper body, and into the footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
The programs can be combined as necessary. cally with the AUTO program.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
Temperature
trols the program in such a way that window
Turn the wheel to set the de‐ condensation is prevented as much as possi‐
sired temperature. ble.
The automatic climate control To switch off the program: press the button
achieves this temperature as again or manually adjust the air distribution.
quickly as possible, if necessary
with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, Intensity of the AUTO program
and then keeps it constant. With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐
Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ matic control of the air volume and air distribu‐
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐ tion can be adjusted.
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
109
Controls Climate
Press the left or right side of the but‐ Via the button on the steering wheel
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ A button on the steering wheel can be used to
sity. quickly switch between recirculated air mode
and the previous setting.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
ALL program
Air volume, manual Press the button.
To be able to manually adjust the air volume, The current temperature setting for
switch off the AUTO program first. the driver's side is transferred to the front pas‐
senger side.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air volume. If the temperature setting is changed on the
driver's side, the temperature on the front pas‐
The selected air volume is shown on the dis‐
senger side changes as well.
play of the automatic climate control.
The program is switched off if the setting is
The air volume of the automatic climate control
changed on the front passenger side or the
may be reduced automatically to save battery
button is pressed again.
power.
Defrosting and defogging windows

Automatic recirculated air mode/
recirculated air mode Press the button.
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ moved from the windshield and the front side
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The windows.
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle. For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
function.
Press the button repeatedly to select
an operating mode: Cooling function
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. The passenger compartment can only be
cooled with the engine running.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the Press the button.
outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐ The air is cooled and dehumidified
matically. and – depending on the temperature setting –
▷ Right LED on, recirculated air mode: the warmed again.
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐
manently blocked. Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off
the recirculated-air mode and press the The cooling function is switched on automati‐
AUTO button to utilize the condensation cally with the AUTO program.
sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto When using the automatic climate control,
the windshield. condensation water, refer to page 132, devel‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
110
Climate Controls
Rear window defroster Draft-free ventilation

Press the button. Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐
coming air.
Switching the system on/off
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
Switching off
vehicle.
Press and hold the left button or, with
Your service center replaces this combined fil‐
the setting at the lowest level, press
ter during routine maintenance.
the left button.
All displays are cleared except for the rear win‐
dow defroster if it is switched on. Parked-car ventilation
When the automatic climate control is
switched off, the supply of outside air is sus‐ The concept
pended. If the air quality deteriorates or the The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
window fogs over, switch the system back on passenger compartment to lower interior tem‐
and increase the air flow rate. peratures.
The system can be switched on and off at any
Switching on external temperature, either directly or by us‐
Press any button, except for the buttons for ing a preset switch-on time. It remains
the ALL program or rear window heating. switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
Ventilation electrical current, refrain from activating it
twice in succession without allowing the bat‐
tery to be recharged in normal operation be‐
tween use.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
They can be operated via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
air flow
Ventilation for cooling

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your direc‐
tion, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the
sun.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
111
Controls Climate
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐

trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting activation times

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Set the desired time.

trol lights up when the switch-on time is acti‐
vated.
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti‐
vated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
112
Interior equipment Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the operating instructions of
the system being operated, the system
is generally compatible with the universal ga‐
rage door opener.
special equipment or the country version. This If you have any questions, please contact:
also applies to safety-related functions and ▷ Your service center.
systems. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
When using the features and systems descri‐ HomeLink is a registered trademark of the
bed here, adhere to local regulations. Gentex Corporation.
Controls on the interior rearview

Universal garage door mirror
opener
The concept
The universal garage door opener can be used
to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐
led systems, such as garage door drives or
lighting systems. The universal garage door
opener replaces up to 3 different hand-held
transmitters. To operate it, the buttons on the
interior rearview mirror must be programmed
1 LED
for the desired functions. The hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system is needed for the pro‐ 2 Buttons
gramming procedure. 3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐
gramming.
During programming
During programming and before activat‐
ing a device using the Universal Garage Door Programming
Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐
mals, or objects in the range of movement of General information
the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there 1. Switch on the ignition.
is a risk of injury or damage. 2. Initial setup:
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐
held transmitter.◀ rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐
functions for security reasons. rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All
programmed settings of the buttons on the
interior rearview mirror are deleted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
113
Controls Interior equipment
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐ In systems with an alternating-code system,
tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1 the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons tem must be additionally synchronized.
on the interior rearview mirror. The re‐ Please obtain additional information on syn‐
quired distance depends on the particular chronization in the operating instructions of
hand-held transmitter. the system being set up.
4. Press the button of the desired function on The systems will be easier to synchronize with
the hand-held transmitter and the button the aid of a second person.
being programmed on the interior rearview
Synchronization:
mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
slowly at first. mote-controlled system.
5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, re‐ 2. Program the corresponding button on the
lease both buttons. Rapid flashing indi‐ interior rearview mirror as described.
cates that the button on the interior rear‐ 3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐
view mirror has been programmed. ton on the system being set up. You have
If the LED does not flash faster after approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
60 seconds, change the distance between 4. Press and hold the button on the interior
the interior rearview mirror and the hand- rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and
held transmitter and repeat the step. Multi‐ then release it. Repeat this step up to three
ple trials at different distances may be nec‐ times if necessary to complete the syn‐
essary. Wait at least 15 seconds between chronization procedure. When synchroni‐
trials. zation is completed, the programmed func‐
6. To program additional functions on other tion is executed.
buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be operated with the buttons Reprogramming individual buttons
on the interior rearview mirror. 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis‐
Special characteristics of alternating- tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from
code radio systems the memory buttons.
If the system cannot be operated after re‐ The required distance depends on the par‐
peated programming, check whether the sys‐ ticular hand-held transmitter.
tem to be operated uses an alternating-code
system. 3. Press the memory button of the universal
garage door opener.
Read the operating instructions of the system
or press and hold the programmed button on 4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
the interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the 20 seconds, press the transmit button on
interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first the hand-held transmitter.
and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds, 5. Release both buttons when the LED
the system is equipped with an alternating- flashes rapidly.
code system. This flashing LED pattern re‐ If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap‐
peats itself for approx. 20 seconds. prox. 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
114
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly Digital compass

after approx. 60 seconds, change the dis‐
tance and repeat the step. If programming
was aborted by the hand-held transmitter,
hold down the memory button and press
and release the button on the hand-held
transmitter several times for 2 seconds.
Controls
Prior to operation
Before operating a unit with the Universal 1 Adjustment button
Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no
2 Display
people, animals, or objects in the range of
movement of the system; otherwise, there is a The display shows you the main or secondary
risk of injury or damage. compass direction in which you are driving.
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
held transmitter.◀ Operating concept
The system, such as the garage door, can be Various functions can be called up by pressing
operated using the button on the interior rear‐ the adjustment button with a pointed object
view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐ such as a pen. The following adjustment op‐
tion switched on. When you are within the re‐ tions are displayed one after the other, de‐
ception range of the system, press and hold pending on how long the adjustment button is
the button until the function is initiated. The pressed:
LED on the interior rearview mirror lights up ▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.
continuously while the radio signal is being ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.
transmitted.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.
Deleting stored functions ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand
steering.
Press the right and left buttons on the interior
rearview mirror simultaneously for approx. ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.
20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All
stored functions are deleted. The functions Setting compass zones
cannot be deleted individually. Set the compass zone corresponding to the
vehicle's geographic location so that the com‐
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
115
Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds. 2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
The number of the compass zone set is shown 3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐
in the display. onds to call up C. Then drive at least one
To change the zone setting, briefly press the full circle at a maximum speed of
adjustment button repeatedly until the display 4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali‐
shows the number of the compass zone corre‐ brated, the C is replaced by the compass
sponding to the current location. directions.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds. Right-hand/left-hand steering
The digital compass is set for right-hand or
Calibrating the digital compass left-hand steering at the factory.
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations: Setting the language
▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown. Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 sec‐
onds. Briefly press the adjustment button
▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not
again to switch between English "E" and Ger‐
change even if the direction of travel
man "O".
changes.
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
▷ Not all compass directions are shown.
10 seconds.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐
jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity
of the vehicle and that there is enough
space to drive in a circle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
116
Sun visor Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition
Glare protection switched on, press in the cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
Folding down back out.
Fold the sun visor down.
Danger of burns
Folding up Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐
erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
Fold the sun visor up.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
Glare protection from the side control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
Folding down themselves.◀
1. Fold the sun visor down. Replace the cover after use
2. Detach from the holder and pivot sideways Replace the lighter or socket cover after
to the side window. use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lighter
socket or power socket could cause a short
Folding up circuit.◀
To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse or‐
der.
Connecting electrical
Vanity mirror
devices
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover on
each sun visor. The mirror lighting comes on Note
when the cover is opened.
Do not connect the charger to the socket
Do not connect the battery charger to
Ashtray/cigarette lighter the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory
as this could damage the battery.◀
Opening
Sockets
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on. The
total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volt.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Pull cover 2 up.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
117
Front center console Cargo area

Cargo covers
Do not place objects on the covers
Do not place objects on the cover; if you
do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu‐
pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or
damage the cover.◀
To load bulky luggage, the covers can be re‐
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. moved.
Rear cover
Rear center console
1. Detach the securing straps from the tail‐
gate.
2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it
back and out of the brackets, arrows 2.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In storage compartment under center

armrest
To access the socket: remove the cover. Front cover
1. Push the cover up and out of the brackets
In cargo area on both sides at the rear, arrow 1.
Fold open the cover. 2. Pull the cover back, up and out of the lat‐
eral brackets on both sides, arrow 2.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
118
Enlarging the cargo area 2. Engage the backrest in the desired posi‐
tion or fold it down.
General information On the left side, the outer and center backrests
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding are adjusted jointly toward the front if both
down the rear seat backrests. backrests are engaged in the same lock-in po‐
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of sition.
40-20-40. The backrests can be adjusted separately to‐
The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different ward the rear. Note that the center backrest
positions between the comfort and transport cannot be tilted farther down than the left
positions and they can be folded down. backrest.
In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted

Center backrest only
back to the greatest possible angle and in the
transport position they are nearly vertical.
Before mounting a child restraint fixing system,
note the instructions, refer to page 52.
Danger of pinching
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that path of movement of the
backrests is clear. Especially when the middle
section is folded down, ensure that no one is
located in or reaches into the path of move‐ 1. Pull the loop, arrow.
ment of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, in‐
2. Engage the backrest in the desired posi‐
juries or damage may result.◀
tion or fold it down.
Observe the instructions concerning the
safety belt Folding the backrests back up
Observe the instructions concerning the safety When the backrests are folded back up, they
belt, refer to page 46. Otherwise, personal pro‐ engage in the transport position.
tection may be compromised.◀ To set the desired backrest tilt or comfort po‐
sition, pull the lever of the left/right backrest or
Outside backrests the loop of the center backrest forward.
Locking the backrest
Before letting passengers ride in the rear,
engage the seat backrests, locking them in
place. Otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐
cident due to unexpected seat movement.◀
Partition net
Firmly attach the partition net
1. Reach into the recess and pull the lever to‐ Make sure that the partition net is firmly
ward the front. attached; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
119
The partition net can be attached behind the Installation behind the rear seats
front or rear seats. 1. If necessary, tilt the rear seat backrests for‐
ward and remove the front cargo cover, re‐
Before installing fer to page 118.
1. Remove the pouch with the partition net 2. Fold open the cover caps 1 of the rear
from the storage compartment under the brackets in the headliner to the point
cargo floor panel in the cargo area. where they engage.
2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un‐ 3. Insert the rods of the partition net 2 all the
roll it, and unfold it. way into the holders on both sides and
After use, fold and roll up the partition net slide forward.
in the same manner and place it in the
pouch so that it can be stowed back under
the cargo floor panel.
Ensure that hooks and tensioning buckles
do not rest on the rod elements.
3. Unfold the partition net to the point where
the rod elements engage.
Mounting eyes
Four mounting eyes are located on the back of 4. Attach the hooks 1 at the bottom of the re‐
the rear seat backrests. taining straps into the eyelets on the rear
seat backrest, arrow, on both sides.
▷ Installation behind the front seats, ar‐

rows 1. 5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
▷ Installation behind the rear seats, arrows 2. tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐
sioning buckles.
Label
Ensure that the partition net is correctly posi‐
tioned, i.e., do not reverse front and back.
The partition net is labeled accordingly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
120
Installation behind the front seats Cargo floor panel
Compartment in floor
Note the maximum permissible load
Do not exceed a maximum load of
55 lbs/25 kg in the storage compartment be‐
neath the cargo floor panel; otherwise, damage
may result.◀
To access the tool kit, for example, lift the stor‐

age compartment at the rear.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
Enlarging the cargo area. To lift, reach into the recess on the rear edge
of the storage compartment.
2. Fold open the cover caps of the front
brackets in the headliner to the point The storage compartment can be removed if
where they engage. necessary.
3. Insert the rods of the partition net all the

Raising the cargo floor panel
way into the holders on both sides and
slide forward.
4. Attach the hooks at the bottom of the re‐
taining straps into the upper eyelets on the
rear seat backrest on both sides.
5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,
tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐
sioning buckles.
Removing
Reach under the cargo floor panel on the left,
To remove and stow the partition net, proceed
right and at the rear. Fold the panel up and for‐
in reverse order.
ward, pressing it into the gap between the
To fold up, press both release buttons, arrows. cargo area floor and the rear seat backrest.
Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor

panel when it is upright.
Do not apply pressure to the cargo floor panel
when it is upright, do not press up or down on
it, and do not adjust the rear seat backrests;
otherwise, damage may result.◀
Before closing the tailgate, fold down the
cargo floor panel. To do this, pull the cargo
floor panel toward the rear, raising it up and out
of the gap.
The cargo floor panel can be removed if nec‐
essary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
121
Lashing eyes
To secure pieces of luggage with nets or draw
straps, lashing eyes are available in the cargo
area, refer to page 135.
Multi-function hooks
Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags

and totes, for example, are located on the left
and right sides of the cargo cover support, ar‐
row.
Do not hang heavy items from the hooks

Only hang light bags or suitable objects
from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger
of objects flying about during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers.
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
has been appropriately secured.◀
Ski and snowboard bag

General information
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
122
Storage compartments Controls
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment Glove compartment
Opening
systems.
Pull the handle.

Notes The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
No loose objects in the passenger com‐
partment
Close the glove compartment again im‐
Do not stow any objects in the passenger mediately
compartment without securing them; other‐
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
wise, they may present a danger to occupants
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐
cur during accidents.◀
neuvers.◀
No non-slip mats on the dashboard Closing

Do not use non-slip materials, such as Fold up the cover.
non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be
damaged by the substances in the materials.◀ USB interface for data transfer
Port for importing and exporting data, such as

music collections, refer to page 179, on USB
devices.
Observe the following when connecting:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
123
Controls Storage compartments
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ Adjusting

nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect a USB hard drive.
▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest front

Slide the center armrest into the desired posi‐
Storage compartment tion.
The center armrest between the front seats
contains a compartment with cupholders or
the cover for the snap-in adapter, depending Center armrest, rear
on the version.
Details on this mobile phone cradle, refer to
page 205.
Opening
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
When folding up, push the center armrest

firmly back into the rear seat backrest.
Pull the center armrest upward.

Connection for an external
audio device
This can be used to connect an external audio
device, such as a CD or MP3 player.
▷ AUX-IN port, refer to page 184.
▷ USB audio interface, refer to page 185.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
124
Storage compartments space at the rear of the storage compart‐

ment for the partition net.
Storage compartments ▷ Storage net next to the storage compart‐
ment on the right in the cargo area.
Interior
▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 123.
▷ Compartments in the center console. Clothes hooks
▷ Compartments in the doors. The clothes hooks are located at the grab han‐
▷ Bottle holders in the doors, cupholders, re‐ dles in the rear.
fer to page 125. Do not obstruct view
When suspending clothing from the
Cargo area hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐
▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 135. er's vision.◀
▷ Storage compartment under the cargo
No heavy objects
floor panel, refer to page 121.
Do not hang heavy objects from the
▷ Left and right storage compartments.
hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger
▷ Multi-function hook, refer to page 122. to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers.◀
Storage compartment package
For your comfort:
Cupholders
Interior
▷ Insertable cupholder, refer to page 126. Notes
▷ Front center armrest, refer to page 124. Shatter-proof containers and no hot
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats. drinks
▷ Retaining straps in the front door compart‐ Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
ments. not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
▷ Rear center armrest with integrated cu‐ the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
pholders.
Unsuitable containers
Cargo area Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
▷ Retaining strap on the left side panel for
damage.◀
securing small items.
▷ Retaining straps on the cargo area floor.
Front
▷ Insertable partition elements for the stor‐
▷ In the front door compartments as a bottle
age compartment under the cargo floor
holder for 1-quart/1 liter bottles, for exam‐
panel, used to variably subdivide the stor‐
ple.
age compartment.
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
With partition net: arrange the partition ele‐
the bottom slanted toward the front.
ments in such a way that there is enough
▷ In the center console.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
125
Controls Storage compartments
Insertable cupholder.
The insertable cupholder is located in the
compartment below the center armrest.
Insert the cupholder in the holder on the center

console.
Rear
▷ In the front door compartments as a bottle
holder for 25-ounce/0.75 liter bottles, for
example.
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder with
the bottom slanted toward the front.
▷ In the center armrest.
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.

To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
126
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
127
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle equipment traction potential until after an initial breaking-
in period.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
special equipment or the country version. This Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
also applies to safety-related functions and prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
systems. contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and discs. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Following part replacement
The same breaking in procedures should be
Breaking-in period
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
General information
vehicle's operating life.
Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to
each other.
The following instructions will help achieve a General driving notes
long vehicle life and good economy.
Closing tailgate
Engine and differential
Drive with the tailgate closed
Always obey all official speed limits.
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km wise, passengers and other road users may be
endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
an accident occurs or during braking or evasive
speeds:
maneuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may
▷ 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h. enter the passenger compartment.◀
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with
transmission's kickdown mode for the initial
the tailgate open:
miles.
▷ Drive moderately.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km ▷ Close all windows and the panoramic glass
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be sunroof.
increased. ▷ Greatly increase the blower speed.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
130
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Hot exhaust system The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire

tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,
Hot exhaust system
refer to page 237.
High temperatures are generated in the
exhaust system. Driving through water
Do not remove the heat shields installed and Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, faster than walking speed, up to
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot 6 mph/10 km/h.
exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐
could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ tions
ous personal injury as well as property dam‐ Do not exceed this water depth and walking
age. speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, electrical systems and the transmission may
there is the danger of getting burned.◀ be damaged.◀
Mobile communication devices in the Braking safely

vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐
hicle Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
way of braking in situations when this is neces‐
It is not recommended to use mobile phones,
sary.
such as mobile phones without a direct con‐
nection to an external aerial in the vehicle's The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐
passenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi‐ ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a
cle electronics and mobile communication de‐ minimum of steering effort.
vices can interfere with each other. In addition, Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
there is no assurance that the radiation gener‐ the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
ated during transmission will be discharged active mode.
from the vehicle interior.◀
Do not let your foot rest on the brake
pedal
Hydroplaning
Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can pedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressure
form between the tires and road surface. can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ possibly even brake failure.◀
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road Objects in the area around the pedals
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle. No objects in the area around the pedals
Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
Hydroplaning
objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ impeded while driving
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
131
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Do not place additional floor mats over existing Brake disc corrosion
mats or other objects. Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
Only use floor mats that have been approved tion on the brake pads are furthered by:
for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in ▷ Low mileage.
place.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ used at all.
tened again when they are returned after being
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
removed, such as for cleaning.◀
Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure
that must be exerted by the pads during brake
Driving in wet conditions
applications to clean the discs is not reached.
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐
every few miles.
fect that generally cannot be corrected.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other road users. Condensation under the parked
The heat generated in this process helps dry vehicle
the brake discs and pads. When using the automatic climate control,
In this way braking efficiency will be available condensation water develops that exits under‐
when you need it. neath the vehicle.
Therefore, traces of condensed water under
Hills the vehicle are normal.
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required.
Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐ Driving on poor roads
sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐
ciency. BMW X1 combines an all-wheel drive system
with the advantages of a normal passenger car.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, Do not drive on unpaved terrain
if necessary. Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as oth‐
Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic erwise the vehicle may be damaged.◀
transmission, refer to page 66.
For your own safety and the safety of passen‐
Avoid load on the brakes gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following
Avoid placing excessive load on the points:
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ ▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear driving; never take risks.
and possibly even brake failure.◀ ▷ Adjust speeds according to road condi‐
tions. The steeper and rougher the road
Do not drive in neutral
surface is, the lower the speed should be.
Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
grades: the engine oil and coolant should
In addition, steering and brake assist is un‐
be filled nearly to the MAX mark.
available with the engine stopped.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
132
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
▷ Use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to

page 99, on steep downhill grades.
▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta‐
cles and drive around these where possi‐
ble.
▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact
between the vehicle body and the ground.
The maximum ground clearance is 8 in‐
ches/20 cm and may vary with the loaded
cargo.
▷ When driving through water, do not exceed
the maximum water height of 12 in‐
ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.
▷ After driving through water, press on the
brake pedal several times at low speeds to
dry the brakes.
▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti‐
vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer
to page 98, briefly.
▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to ena‐
ble the driving stability control systems to
distribute the drive force to the individual
wheels.
After driving on poor roads

Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi‐
cle safety:
▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt
and mud from the vehicle body.
▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels
and tires and check for damage.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
133
Driving tips Loading
Loading
Vehicle equipment ▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
This chapter describes all series equipment as or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
well as country-specific and special equipment vehicle and unstable driving situations
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
systems. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or
YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
General information
For example, if the YYY amount equals
Overloading the vehicle 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐ passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
increases the rate at which damage develops 400 lbs.
inside the tires. This could result in a sudden 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
No fluids in the cargo area cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the calculated in Step 4.
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐
aged.◀ 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transfered to your
vehicle. Consult the manual for transport‐
ing a trailer to determine how this may re‐
Determining the load limit duce the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐

hicle’s placard:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
134
Loading Driving tips
Load bump against the rear window while the

vehicle is in motion.
Securing cargo
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing cargo Securing cargo

▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps, a cargo net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Cargo straps can be attached to two lash‐
ing eyes on the cargo area side panel, ar‐
rows 1, and two lashing eyes on the cargo
area rear panel, arrows 2.
Securing cargo
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
Stow and secure the cargo as described
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
above; otherwise it may present a danger to
belts in the opposite buckle.
the occupants, for instance during braking and
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as avoidance maneuvers.
low as possible, ideally directly behind the
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the
backrests.
passenger compartment without securing
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners. them; otherwise, they may present a danger to
▷ Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge occupants, for instance during braking and
of the backrests. avoidance maneuvers.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests Never exceed either the approved gross vehi‐
to stow cargo. cle weight or either of the approved axle loads,
▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 119, to as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard,
protect passengers. Make sure that ob‐ and may also place you in violation of traffic
jects cannot penetrate the partition net. safety laws.
▷ Place protective material around any

sharp-edged or pointed objects that could
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
135
Driving tips Loading
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
the heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure path of the tailgate.
cargo using the upper top tether, refer to ▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration
page 53, mounting points; otherwise, these and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐
may become damaged.◀ tly.
Roof-mounted luggage rack Rear luggage rack

Notes Notes
A special rack system is available as an op‐ A special rear rack is available as an optional
tional accessory. accessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.
Follow the installation instructions for the rear
Anchorage points rack.
The anchorage points are located on the roof
railing. Anchorage points
Attachment
Follow the installation instructions for the roof-
mounted luggage rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the panoramic glass
sunroof.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center The anchorage points are under the covers in
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐ the bumper. Remove the covers, refer to
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐ page 260.
sponse.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not be too large in
area.
▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Fasten the roof-mounted luggage se‐
curely, for instance using lashing straps.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
136
Saving fuel Driving tips
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Closing the windows and
This chapter describes all series equipment as panoramic glass sunroof
well as country-specific and special equipment Driving with the panoramic glass sunroof and
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also windows open results in increased air resist‐
describes equipment that may not be found in ance and raises fuel consumption.
Check the tire inflation
systems.
pressure regularly
bed here, adhere to local regulations. Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐
tion pressure, refer to page 230, at least twice
a month and before starting on a long trip.
General information Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
tire wear.
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Drive away without delay
ferent factors.
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
ing style and regular maintenance, refer to
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
page 245, can have an influence on fuel con‐
sumption and on the environmental impact. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
reach its operating temperature.
Remove unnecessary cargo

Look well ahead when
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Remove attached parts By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
following use cle driving ahead of you.
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces
rear luggage racks after use. fuel consumption.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel
consumption and minimizes wear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
137
Driving tips Saving fuel
Use coasting conditions Have maintenance carried

When approaching a red light, take your foot out
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
a halt. optimal vehicle economy and operating life.
On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the Have the maintenance carried out by your
accelerator and let the vehicle roll. service center.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Please also note the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 245.
Switch off the engine during

longer stops ECO PRO
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., The concept
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
ECO PRO supports the driver in achieving high
congestion.
fuel economy. Engine control and comfort
functions, such as the climate control system,
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function are adjusted accordingly.
The Automatic Start/Stop Function of your ve‐
In addition, situation-related information can
hicle automatically switches off the engine
be displayed that helps the driver achieve
during a stop. Additional information on the
lower fuel consumption.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function, refer to
page 59. The resulting range extension can be dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
If the engine is stopped and then started again,
fuel consumption and emissions drop com‐
Activating ECO PRO
pared to an engine that runs permanently.
Stopping the engine even for just a few sec‐ Press the button; the LED above the
onds can result in savings. button lights up.
Use of this system can cause premature wear ECO PRO appears in the instrument cluster
on certain vehicle components. and DSC is activated if necessary.
In addition, fuel consumption depends on
other factors as well, such as driving style, road Displays in the instrument cluster
conditions, maintenance, and environmental
factors.
Switch off any functions that

are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
consume additional fuel, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic. After activation, ECO PRO and the bonus
Therefore, switch off these functions if they range are displayed in the instrument cluster.
are not actually needed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
138
Saving fuel Driving tips
ECO PRO bonus range To achieve better fuel economy, the actual
The vehicle's cruising range can be extended temperature may vary slightly from the set
by adjusting your driving style. temperature and the passenger compartment
may be heated or cooled more slowly.
This extended range can be displayed as a bo‐
nus range in the instrument cluster.
Deactivating ECO PRO
The bonus range is indicated in the range dis‐
play. Press the button again.
The bonus range is automatically reset after The LED above the button and the
refueling. ECO PRO display in the instrument cluster go
out.
Driving style
ECO PRO displays the efficiency of the current
driving style in the instrument cluster.
▷ ECO PRO not highlighted: efficient driving
style.
▷ ECO PRO highlighted: adjust your driving
style, for example by accelerating less
quickly.
To drive efficiently:
▷ Accelerate less quickly.
▷ Brake in advance.
▷ Reduce speed to the ECO PRO speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
▷ Automatic transmission: shift from S to D,
or avoid shifting manually.
ECO PRO tip

Situation-related tips that indicate measures to
achieve optimum fuel economy can be dis‐
played.
A reminder is displayed when the ECO PRO
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h is exceeded.
Displaying the ECO PRO tip

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "ECO PRO Tips"
ECO PRO climate control

Climate control is adjusted for optimum fuel
economy.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
139
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Navigation
This chapter contains various examples of how
the navigation system can guide you reliably to
your destination.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Navigation Navigation system
Navigation system
Vehicle equipment Navigation data
Information on navigation data
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also 1. "Navigation"
describes equipment that may not be found in 2. Open "Options".
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected 3. "Navigation system version"
Information is displayed on the data ver‐
sion.
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐ Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
General information can be updated.
The navigation system can determine the pre‐ Current navigation data and the authorization
cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of sat‐ code are available from your service center.
ellites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably
▷ Depending on the data volume, a data up‐
guide you to every entered destination.
date may take several hours.
Entries in stationary vehicle ▷ Update during the trip to preserve battery.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐ ▷ During the update, only the basic functions
tionary, and always give priority to the applica‐ of the navigation system are available.
ble traffic regulations in the event of any con‐
▷ The status of the update can be viewed.
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation ▷ After the updating process is complete, the
system. Failure to take to this precaution can system restarts.
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle ▷ Remove the medium with the navigation
occupants and other road users in danger.◀ data after the update.
Opening the navigation system Performing an update

1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
1. Press the button on the controller. player with the labeled side facing up.
2. "Navigation" 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
The navigation system can also be called
up directly using the button on the con‐ 3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga‐
troller. tion DVD.
4. Change the DVD if necessary.
After the trip is interrupted, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
142
Navigation system Navigation
Viewing the status

1. Open "Options".
2. "Navigation update"
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
143
Navigation Destination entry
Destination entry
Vehicle equipment system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
This chapter describes all series equipment as occupants and other road users in danger.◀
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected Manual destination entry
also applies to safety-related functions and General information
systems. The system supports you in entering street
When using the features and systems descri‐ names and house numbers by automatically
bed here, adhere to local regulations. completing the entry and providing entry com‐
parisons, refer to page 23.
Stored town/city and street names can be
At a glance called up quickly.
▷ If the existing entries should not be
In entering your destination you can select
changed, the entries for the state/province
from the following options:
and town/city can be skipped.
▷ Enter the destination manually, see below.
▷ Destination guidance is started to the
▷ Select the destination from the address town/city center if no street is entered.
book, refer to page 146.
▷ Last destinations, refer to page 147. Entering a state/province
▷ Special destinations, refer to page 147.
▷ Destination entry via map, refer to
page 149. 2. "Navigation"
▷ Using the home address as the destina‐ 3. "Enter address"
tion, refer to page 147.
▷ Destination entry by voice, refer to
page 150.
▷ Destination entry via the Concierge serv‐
ice, refer to page 149.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 22.
Entries in stationary vehicle 4. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta‐ state/province.
tionary, and always give priority to the applica‐
ble traffic regulations in the event of any con‐
tradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
144
Destination entry Navigation
Entering a town/city If there are several streets with the same

1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐ name:
played town/city. 1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street.
3. Select the street.
Alternative: enter the street address

and house number
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter the street as you would the town/
city.
2. Select letters, if necessary. 3. "House number"
The list is narrowed down further with each 4. Select the numbers.
entry. 5. Change to the list of house numbers.
3. Move the controller to the right. 6. Select a house number or range of house
4. Select the name of the town/city from the numbers.
list.
Street does not exist in the
If there are several towns/cities with the same
destination city/town
name:
The desired street does not exist in the speci‐
1. Change to the list of town/city names. fied city/town because it belongs to another
2. Highlight the town/city. part of the city/town.
3. Select the town/city. 1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis‐
played town/city. 4. Change to the list of street names.
2. Select the symbol. 5. Select "In" with the state/province cur‐
rently displayed.
3. Select the numbers.
All streets of the selected state/province
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
are offered. The associated town/city is
towns/cities.
displayed after the street name.
5. Highlight the entry.
6. Selecting an entry.
Entering a street and intersection

2. Enter a street and intersection in the same
way as you would enter a town/city.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
145
6. Select the letters. Storing the destination in the address

7. Change to the list of street names. book
8. Highlight the street. After entering the destination, store the desti‐
nation in the address book.
9. Select the street.
1. "Navigation"
Starting destination guidance after 2. "Map"
entering the destination
3. "Guidance"
1. "Accept destination"
4. Open "Options".
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
destination"
contact"
Add, refer to page 151, a destination as a
further destination.
Address book
Create contacts, refer to page 216.
Selecting a destination from the

address book
1. "Navigation" 6. Select an existing contact, if available.
2. "Address book" 7. "Business address" or "Home address"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if 8. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
these addresses have been checked as name".
destinations in the contacts.
9. "Store in vehicle"
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone are not displayed, they first Storing the position
need to be checked as destinations, refer
The current position can be stored in the ad‐
to page 217.
dress book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add
position to contact"
3. Select a contact in the list or, if desired,

with "A-Z search".
4. "Business address" or "Home address"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
146
4. Depending on the selection, choose an ex‐ Calling up the last destination

isting contact from the list. Select the type 1. "Navigation"
of address and enter the first and last
2. "Last destinations"
name.
Editing or deleting an address

1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry"
Starting destination guidance

Using the home address as the
destination 1. "Navigation"
The home address must be stored. Specify the 2. "Last destinations"
home address, refer to page 209. 3. Select the destination.
1. "Navigation" 4. "Start guidance"
2. "Address book"
Editing the destination
3. "Home"
1. "Navigation"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations

1. "Navigation"
4. "Start guidance"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
Last destinations 5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last
destinations"
At a glance
The destinations previously entered are stored
automatically. Special destinations
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
General information
Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐
tion on specific special destinations may have
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
147
changed; for example, gas stations might not 10. Select the symbol.
be in operation. 11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
Opening the search for special
Add a destination as a further destination,
destinations
refer to page 151.
Selection of special destinations, such as ho‐
"Start search": if a search term is not entered,
tels or tourist attractions.
the search is repeated with the previous
1. "Navigation" search term.
2. "Points of Interest"
Category search
3. Select the search function.
1. "Category search"
Online Search 2. "Town/City"
1. "Google™ Local Search" 3. Select or enter the town/city.
2. Select a special destination. 4. "Category"
3. Select the symbol. 5. Select the category.
4. "Start guidance" 6. "Category details"
For some special destinations, multiple
A-Z search category details can be selected. Move the
1. "A-Z search" controller to the left to leave the category
2. "Town/City" details.
3. Select or enter the town/city. 7. "Start search"
4. "Category" A list of the special destinations is dis‐

played.
5. Select the category.
8. Select a special destination.
6. "Category details"
Details are displayed.
For some special destinations, multiple
category details can be selected. Move the If multiple details are stored, you can leaf
controller to the left to leave the category through the pages.
details. If a phone number is available, a connec‐
7. "Keyword" tion can be established if necessary.
8. Enter the keyword. 9. Select the symbol.
A list of the special destinations is dis‐ 10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
played. destination"
9. Select a special destination. Add a destination as a further destination,

refer to page 151.
Details are displayed.
If multiple details are stored, you can leaf Display of special destinations
through the pages.
List of special destinations: special destina‐
If a phone number is available, a connec‐ tions are arranged by distance and appear with
tion can be established if necessary. a directional arrow pointing to the special des‐
tination.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
148
In the splitscreen, special destinations of the 3. "Interactive map"

selected category are displayed in the map
view as symbols. The display depends on the
scale of the map and the category.
Destination entry via the Concierge

service
A connection is established to the Concierge
service, refer to page 219.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address" 4. Select the destination with crosshairs.
3. Open "Options". ▷ To change the scale: turn the control‐
ler.
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in
Displaying special destinations in the the required direction.
map ▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the
To display symbols of the special destinations controller in the required direction and
in the map view: turn it.
1. "Navigation" Specifying the street

2. "Map" If the system does not recognize the street,
3. Open "Options". one of the following pieces of information is
4. "Display Points of Interest" displayed:
5. Select the setting. ▷ A street name in the vicinity.

▷ The county.
▷ The coordinates of the destination.
Destination entry by map
Additional functions
Selecting the destination Additional functions are available on the inter‐
1. "Navigation" active map after the controller is pressed.
2. "Map"
The current position of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the map.
▷ Select the symbol.

"Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
149
Add a destination as a further destination, ▷ The methods of entry depend on the navi‐
refer to page 151. gation data in use and the country and lan‐
▷ "Exit interactive map": return to the map guage settings.
view.
Entering the address in a command
▷ "View in northern direction" or "View in
driving direction"
▷ "Display destination": the map section wheel.
around the destination is displayed.
2. ›Enter address‹
▷ "Display current location": the map section
3. Wait for a request from the system.
around your current location is displayed.
4. Say the address in the suggested order.
▷ "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is started. 5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
If necessary, individually name the sepa‐
Destination entry by voice rate components of the address, e.g., the
town/city.
General information
▷ Instructions for voice activation system, re‐ Entering a town/city separately
fer to page 25. The town/city can be said as a complete word.
▷ When making a destination entry by voice, With the destination entry menu displayed:
you can change between voice operation
and iDrive. 1. Press the button on the steering
▷ To have the available spoken instructions wheel.
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹. 2. ›City‹ or ›Spell city‹
3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
Saying the entries
town/city.
▷ The town/city, street, and house number
4. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
can be entered using a single command.
least the first three letters.
▷ Countries, towns and cities, streets, and
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/
intersections can be said as whole words
cities may be suggested.
or spelled in the language of the system,
refer to page 77. 5. Select a location:
Example: to enter a destination in a US ▷ Select a recommended town/
state as a whole word, the system lan‐ city: ›Yes‹.
guage must be English. ▷ Select a different town/city: ›New
▷ Spell the entry if the spoken language and entry‹.
the language of the system differ. ▷ Select an entry: ›Entry ...‹, for instance,
▷ Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag‐ entry 2.
gerating the pronunciation and inserting ▷ Spell an entry: ›Spell city‹.
lengthy pauses between the letters. 6. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
150
If there are several towns/cities with the same 6. Select the type of destination entry.
name:
Towns/cities of the same name are grouped in
a list and displayed as one location followed by
an ellipsis.
1. Select an entry: ›Yes‹ or ›Entry ...‹, e. g., En‐

try 2.
2. Select the desired town/city.
Entering a street or intersection

separately 7. Enter the intermediate destination.
Enter a street and intersection in the same way 8. "Start guidance"
as you would enter a town/city.
Entering intermediate destinations
Entering a house number separately A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations
Depending on the data in the navigation sys‐ can be entered for a trip.
tem, house numbers up to number 2,000 can 1. "Enter new destination"
be entered.
2. Select the type of destination entry.
1. ›House number‹ 3. Enter the intermediate destination.
2. Say the house number. 4. "Add as another destination"
Say each digit separately. The intermediate destination is entered in
3. Continue making the entry as prompted by the destination list and is highlighted.
the system. 5. Turn the controller until the intermediate
destination is located at the desired loca‐
Starting destination guidance tion in the list.
›Start guidance‹ 6. Press the controller.
Starting the trip

Planning a trip with 1. After all intermediate destinations are en‐
intermediate destinations tered, highlight the first destination.
If the second destination, for example, is
New trip
highlighted when destination guidance is
A trip can be planned with several intermediate started, the first destination is skipped.
destinations.
2. "Start guidance"
1. "Navigation" This symbol marks the active leg of the
2. "Map" trip.
3. Move the controller to the left if necessary.
4. "Guidance"
5. "Enter new destination"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
151
Storing a trip 3. Highlight the desired trip.

Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. If 4. Open "Options".
necessary, delete existing trips to be able to 5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip"
store new trips.
1. Open "Options". Opening the last trip

2. "Store trip" 1. "Navigation"
3. Enter a name for the trip. 2. "Stored trips"
4. "OK" 3. "Last trip"

4. "Start guidance"
Selecting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select a stored trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Changing the trip direction

Intermediate destinations are displayed in re‐
verse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Intermediate destination options

1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
▷ "Edit destination"
▷ "Reposition dest. in the trip": move an
intermediate destination to another po‐
sition in the list.
▷ "Delete dest. in the trip"
▷ "Go to next dest. in the trip"
Some options are not available for certain trips.
Deleting a stored trip

1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
152
Destination guidance Navigation
Destination guidance
Vehicle equipment Continuing destination
This chapter describes all series equipment as guidance
well as country-specific and special equipment If the destination was not reached during the
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
systems. Route criteria
General information
▷ The route calculated can be influenced by
selecting certain criteria.
Starting destination ▷ The route criteria can be changed when
the destination is entered and during desti‐
guidance nation guidance.
1. "Navigation" ▷ Road types are part of the navigation data
2. Make a destination entry, refer to and are taken into consideration when
page 144. planning a route, e.g., avoid highways.
3. "Accept destination" ▷ The recommended route may differ from
the route you would take based on per‐
4. "Start guidance"
sonal experience.
The route is shown on the Control Display.
▷ The settings are stored for the remote
The distance to the destination/intermediate control currently in use.
destination and the estimated time of arrival
▷ Destination guidance with traffic bulletins,
are displayed in the map view.
refer to page 159.
Changing the route criteria

Terminating destination 1. "Navigation"
guidance
2. "Map"
1. "Navigation" 3. "Route preference"
2. "Map" 4. Select the criterion:
3. "Guidance" ▷ "Fast route": time-optimized route,
4. "Stop guidance" being a combination of the shortest
possible route and the fastest roads.
▷ "ECO PRO route" or "Efficient
route": optimized combination of the
fastest and shortest possible route.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
153
Navigation Destination guidance
▷ "Short route": short distance, irre‐ ▷ Small arrow: indicates the next change in
spective of how fast or slow progress direction.
will be. ▷ Intersection view.
▷ "Alternative routes": if available, alter‐ ▷ Lane information.
native routes are suggested during ac‐
▷ Traffic bulletins.
tive destination guidance.
▷ Distance to the next change in direction.
The individual suggestions are high‐
lighted in color. ▷ Street name at the next change in direc‐
tion.
Lane information
On multi-lane roads, the recommended lanes
are marked in the arrow view by a triangle.
▷ Solid triangle: best lane.
▷ Empty triangle: possible lane. However,
another lane change may be needed
shortly.
5. Specify additional criteria for the route, if
necessary: Displaying a list of route sections
▷ "Avoid highways": highways are When destination guidance is active, a list of
avoided wherever possible. the route sections can be displayed. The driv‐
ing distance and traffic bulletins are displayed
▷ "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are
for each route section.
avoided wherever possible.
▷ "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided 1. "Navigation"
where possible. 2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a route section.
The route section is displayed on the split
Route screen.
Different views of the route are available during
destination guidance:
▷ Arrow view. Bypassing a section of the
▷ List of route sections. route
▷ Map view, refer to page 155. Calculate a new route for a route section.
1. "Navigation"
Arrow view
2. "Route information"
The following information is displayed during
destination guidance:
▷ Large arrow: indicates the current direction
of travel.
▷ Street name of the road currently being
driven on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
154
3. "New route for" 6. Select the symbol.

7. "Start guidance": destination guidance to
the selected gas station is started.
"Add as another destination": the gas sta‐
tion is added to the route.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
4. Turn the controller. Enter the number of Switching spoken instructions on/off
kilometers within which you would like to The setting is stored for the remote control
return to the original route. currently in use.
1. "Navigation"
Resuming the original route 2. "Map"
If the route section should no longer be by‐ 3. "Voice instructions"
passed:
Repeating a spoken instruction
1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
2. "Map"
3. "New route for:"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. "Remove blocking"
4. Press the controller twice.
Volume of spoken instructions

Gas station recommendation
Turn the volume knob while giving an spoken
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta‐ instruction until the desired volume is set.
tions along the route are displayed if needed.
Even with the latest navigation data, informa‐ currently in use.
tion on individual special destinations may
have changed; for example, gas stations might Saving the spoken instructions on the
not be in operation. programmable memory buttons
1. "Navigation" The function for switching the spoken instruc‐
2. "Route information" tions on/off can be stored on a programmable
memory button, refer to page 22, for quick ac‐
3. "Recommended refuel"
cess.
A list of the gas stations is displayed.
4. Highlight a gas station.
The position of the gas station is shown on Map view
the split screen.
Selecting the map view
5. Select the gas station.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
155
At a glance Status fields

Show/hide: press the controller.
▷ Upper status field: time, telephone, and en‐
tertainment details.
▷ Lower status field: symbol for active desti‐
nation guidance, status of traffic bulletins,
time of arrival, and distance to destination.
Function bar
The following functions are available in the
1 Function bar function bar:
2 Route section with traffic obstruction
Symbol Function
3 Traffic sign for traffic obstruction
Start/end destination guidance.
4 Planned route
5 Current location Switch spoken instructions on/
6 Upper status field off.
7 Lower status field Change the route criteria.
Search for a special destina‐

Lines in the map tion.
Streets and routes are displayed in different
Display traffic bulletins.
colors and styles depending on their classifica‐
tion. Dashed lines represent railways and ferry Open the interactive map.
connections. Country borders are indicated by
Set the map view.
thin lines.
Change the scale.
Traffic obstructions
Small triangles along the planned route indi‐ To change to the function bar, move the con‐
cate route sections with traffic obstructions, troller to the left.
depending on the map scale. The direction of
the triangles indicates the direction of the ob‐ Changing the map section
struction.
"Interactive map"
The traffic signs indicate the significance of
▷ To shift the map: move the controller in the
the obstruction.
required direction.
▷ Red traffic sign: the obstruction affects the
▷ To shift the map diagonally: move the con‐
planned route or direction.
troller in the required direction and turn it.
▷ Grey traffic sign: the obstruction does not
affect the planned route or direction. Changing the scale
Traffic bulletins, refer to page 157. 1. Select the symbol.
2. To change the scale: turn the controller.
Planned route
After destination guidance is started, the plan‐
ned route is displayed on the map.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
156
Automatically scaled map scale 3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
In the map view facing north, turn the control‐ until the split screen is selected.
ler in any direction until the AUTO scale is dis‐ 4. Select "Split screen content" or the scale.
played. The entire route between the current 5. Select the map view.
location and the destination is displayed on the
▷ "Arrow display"
map.
▷ "Map facing north"
Settings for the map view ▷ "Map direction of travel"
The settings are stored for the remote control ▷ "Map view with perspective"
currently in use. ▷ "Position"
1. "Navigation" ▷ "Exit ramp view": selected blind drive‐
2. "Map" ways are displayed three dimension‐
ally.
3. Open "Options".
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map"
4. "Settings"
6. To change the scale: select the split
5. To set the map view:
screen and turn the controller.
▷ "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions. Traffic bulletins
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the
setting is disregarded. At a glance
▷ "Satellite images" ▷ Display the traffic bulletins from radio sta‐
tions that broadcast the TI Traffic Informa‐
Depending on availability and resolution,
tion of a traffic information service. Infor‐
satellite images are displayed at scales of
mation on traffic obstructions and hazards
approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to
is updated continuously.
1,000 km.
Certain BMW models equipped with navi‐
▷ "Perspective view in 3D"
gation have the capability to display real-
Prominent areas that are contained in the time traffic information. If your system has
navigation data are displayed on the map in this capability the following additional
3D. terms and conditions apply:
▷ "Traffic conditions/gray map" An End-User shall no longer have the right
The map is optimized for displaying traffic to use the Traffic Data in the event that the
bulletins, refer to page 158. End-User is in material breach of the terms
Symbols for the special destinations are no and conditions contained herein.
longer displayed. A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. (“Total Traffic
Map view for splitscreen Network”) holds the rights to the traffic in‐
The map view can be selected for the split cident data and RDS-TMC network
screen independently from the main screen: through which it is delivered. You may not
modify, copy, scan or use any other
1. Open "Options". method to reproduce, duplicate, republish,
2. "Split screen" transmit or distribute in any way any por‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
157
tion of traffic incident data. You agree to in‐ tract and tort (such as negligence, product
demnify, defend and hold harmless BMW liability and strict liability). Some states do
of North America, LLC. (“BMW NA”) and not allow the exclusion or limitation of inci‐
Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their dental or consequential damages, so those
affiliates) against any and all claims, dam‐ particular limitations may not apply to you.
ages, costs or other expenses that arise di‐ ▷ The traffic bulletins are indicated on the
rectly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthor‐ map by symbols.
ized use of the traffic incident data or the
▷ The traffic bulletins for the surrounding
RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of
area are stored in a list.
this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or
unlawful activities by you in connection The symbol in the function bar of the
herewith. map view turns red if there are traffic bulle‐
tins that affect the calculated route.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is infor‐
mational only. User assumes all risk of use.
Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their
Switching the reception on/off
suppliers make no representations about 1. "Navigation"
content, traffic and road conditions, route 2. Open "Options".
usability, or speed. 3. "Receive Traffic Info"
C. The licensed material is provided to li‐
censee “as is,” and “where is”. Total Traf‐ Opening the list of traffic bulletins
fic Network, including, but not limited to, 1. "Navigation"
any and all third party providers of any of
the licensed material, expressly disclaims, 2. "Map"
to the fullest extent permitted by law, all 3. "Traffic Info"
warranties or representations with respect First, traffic bulletins for the calculated
to the licensed material (including, without route are displayed.
limitation, that the licensed material will be
The traffic bulletins are sorted by their dis‐
error-free, will operate without interruption
tance from the current position of the vehi‐
or that the traffic data will be accurate), ex‐
cle.
press, implied or statutory, including, with‐
out limitation, the implied warranties of 4. Select a traffic bulletin.
merchantability, non-infringement fitness "More information": display additional
for a particular purpose, or those arising information.
from a course of dealing or usage of trade. 5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. if required.
or BMW NA will be liable to you for any in‐
direct, special, consequential, exemplary, Traffic bulletins on the map
or incidental damages (including, without "Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
limitation, lost revenues, anticipated reve‐
The Control Display changes to a black and
nues, or profits relating to the same) arising
white display. This enables a better view of the
from any claim relating directly or indirectly
traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disre‐
to use of the traffic data, and even if Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are
aware of the possibility of such damages.
These limitations apply to all claims, in‐
cluding, without limitation, claims in con‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
158
garded in this setting. Symbols and special 4. "Traffic Info categories"

destinations are not displayed. 5. Select the desired category.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view

Depending on the scale of the map and the lo‐
cation of the traffic obstruction along the route, Traffic bulletins of the selected category are
the symbols for the traffic obstructions are dis‐ displayed on the map.
played.
▷ Traffic bulletins that are relevant to the
route are always shown.
Additional information in the map view
▷ For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc‐
notify you of potentially dangerous situa‐
tion's length, direction, and impact are dis‐
tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot
played in the map using triangles or gray bars
be hidden.
along the calculated route.
▷ Red: traffic congestion Destination guidance with traffic
▷ Orange: stop-and-go traffic bulletins
▷ Yellow: heavy traffic
General information
▷ Green: clear roads
Detour suggestions from the navigation sys‐
▷ Gray: general traffic bulletins such as road tem can be manually accepted when using
construction semi-dynamic destination guidance. When us‐
The displayed information depends on the par‐ ing dynamic destination guidance, they are au‐
ticular traffic information service. tomatically accepted for route guidance.
Filtering traffic bulletins Semi-dynamic destination guidance

You can set which traffic bulletins appear on When traffic bulletin reception is switched on,
the map. semi-dynamic destination guidance is active.
1. "Navigation" The destination guidance system takes the
available traffic bulletins into account. A mes‐
2. "Map"
sage is displayed depending on the route, the
3. Open "Options". traffic bulletins, and the possible detour routes.
If possible, a detour is offered in case of traffic
obstructions.
The upper part of the message shows:
▷ Symbol of the first traffic obstruction, pos‐
sibly with the distance to the beginning of
the obstruction.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
159
▷ Total length of the traffic obstructions on Activating dynamic destination guidance

the route. 1. "Navigation"
▷ Time by which the trip is extended due to 2. Open "Options".
the traffic obstructions.
3. "Dynamic guidance"
The lower part of the message shows:
▷ Detour recommendation with the distance
to the beginning of the detour.
▷ Difference between the length of the new
route compared to the original route.
▷ Time gained if the detour is taken com‐
pared to the original route with the traffic
obstructions.
Both the original route, shown in white, and the
detour are displayed on the split screen.
Accepting the detour

"Detour"
In the event of special hazards, e. g., objects on
the road, a message is displayed without a de‐
tour suggestion.
Detours can also be accepted if the traffic
messages are called up in the list.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Traffic Info"
4. "Detour information"
5. "Detour"
Dynamic destination guidance

The route is automatically changed in the
event of traffic obstructions.
▷ The system does not point out traffic ob‐
structions along the original route.
▷ Traffic bulletins continue to be displayed
on the map.
▷ Depending on road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the calcu‐
lated route may lead through the traffic ob‐
struction.
▷ Dangerous situations are displayed regard‐
less of the setting.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
160
What to do if... Navigation
What to do if...
Vehicle equipment The Control Display changes to a black
and white display. This enables a better
This chapter describes all series equipment as view of the traffic bulletins.
▷ Spoken instructions are no longer output
during route guidance in front of intersec‐
tions?
special equipment or the country version. This The area has not yet been fully recorded,
also applies to safety-related functions and or you have left the recommended route
systems. and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new route suggestion.
What to do if...
▷ The current transmission position cannot
be displayed?
The vehicle is located in an unrecognized
region, is in a poor reception area, or the
system is currently determining the posi‐
tion. Reception is usually best when you
have an unobstructed view of the sky.
▷ The destination without street information
is not used for route guidance?
When city has been input, no downtown
can be determined. Input any street in the
selected city and start destination guid‐
ance.
▷ The destination is not used for route guid‐
ance?
The destination data are not contained in
the navigation data. Select a destination
that is as close as possible to the original.
▷ Letters for destination input cannot be se‐
lected?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a goal that is as
close as possible to the original.
▷ Is the map displayed in shades of gray?
"Traffic conditions/gray map" active:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
161
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Entertainment
This chapter helps assure your enjoyment when
receiving radio stations and playing CDs, DVDs,
and tracks from the music collection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Entertainment Tone
Tone
Vehicle equipment 3. Select the desired tone settings.

systems.
bed here, adhere to local regulations. 4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
General information
The sound settings are stored for the remote
Equalizer
control currently in use. Setting for individual audio frequency ranges.
Adjusting the equalizer

Treble, bass, balance, and 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
fader 2. "Tone"
▷ "Treble": treble adjustment. 3. "Equalizer"
▷ "Bass": depth adjustment. 4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Balance": left/right volume distribution.
▷ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution.
Setting treble, bass, balance, and

fader
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
164
Tone Entertainment
Multi-channel playback, Adjusting the volume

surround 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
2. "Tone"
Choose between stereo and multi-channel
playback, surround. 3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.
Setting multi-channel playback,
surround
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"
5. To adjust: turn the controller.

Resetting the tone settings

When surround is activated, multi-channel All tone settings can be reset to the default
playback is simulated when a stereo audio setting.
track is played.
2. "Tone"
Volume 3. "Reset"
▷ "Speed volume": speed-dependent vol‐
ume control.
▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal com‐
pared to the entertainment sound output.
▷ "Gong": volume of the signal, such as the
safety belt reminder, compared to the en‐
tertainment sound output.
▷ "Microphone": volume of the microphone
during a phone call.
▷ "Loudspeak.": volume of the loudspeakers
during a phone call.
The following volumes are only stored for the
respective paired telephone: "Microphone",
"Loudspeak.".
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
165
Entertainment Radio
Radio
Vehicle equipment Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
special equipment or the country version. This AM/FM station
systems. Selecting a station
When using the features and systems descri‐ 1. "Radio"
bed here, adhere to local regulations. 2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
Controls
All saved stations are stored for the remote

control currently in use.
1 Volume, on/off
2 Change wave band Changing the station
3 Change entertainment sources Turn the controller and press it
4 Change station/track or
5 Programmable memory buttons Press the button
or
Sound output Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer
to page 12.
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press
Storing a station
ON/OFF button on the radio. 1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
166
Radio Entertainment
3. Highlight the desired station. 3. Select the desired station.

4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename to:"
If necessary, wait for the desired name to
be displayed.
The selected station name is added to the list
of current stations and stored stations.
RDS
RDS broadcasts additional information, such
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
as the station name, in the FM wave band.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control Switching the RDS on/off
currently in use. 1. "Radio"
The stations can also be stored on the pro‐ 2. "FM"
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 22.
3. Open "Options".
Selecting a station manually 4. "RDS"
Station selection via the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. To select the frequency: turn the control‐
ler.

currently in use.
HD Radio™ reception
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi‐
tal signals.
License conditions
To store the station: press the controller for an HD Radio Technology manufactured under li‐
extended period. cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.
and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,
Renaming a station HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade‐
An FM station with changing station names marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
can be renamed.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
167
Entertainment Radio
Activating/deactivating digital radio 2. Press the controller.

reception 3. Select the substation.
1. "Radio" When reception is poor, the substation is
2. "FM" or "AM" muted.
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
Satellite radio
currently in use. General information
This symbol is displayed in the status line The channels are offered in predefined pack‐
when the audio signal is digital. ages. The packages must be enabled by tele‐
When tuning to a station with a digital signal, it phone.
may take several seconds for the station to be
played back in digital quality. Navigation bar overview
Note on HD stations whose station name ends
in ...HD or with ...HD1: Symbol Function
In areas in which the station is not continu‐ Change the list view.
ously received in digital mode, the playback
switches between analog and digital reception. Select the category.
In this case, switch off digital radio reception. Direct channel entry
Note on HD multicast stations whose station
name ends in ...HD2, ...HD3, ...: Timeshift
In areas in which the station is not continu‐ Open the My Favorites cate‐
ously received in digital mode, the audible sig‐ gory/open a favorite.
nal may be interrupted for several seconds.
Manage the favorites.
This is reception related.
Traffic Jump
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional informa‐ The functions of the navigation bar symbols
tion on the current track, such as the name of can also be stored on the programmable mem‐
the artist. ory buttons, refer to page 22.
Managing a subscription
2. Open "Options".
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
3. "Station info"
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed
Selecting a substation view of the sky. The channel name is displayed
This symbol indicates that a main station in the status line.
also broadcasts additional substations. The
station name of the main station ends in HD1.
Station names of the substations end in HD2,
HD3, etc.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
168
Radio Entertainment
Enabling channels 4. "Manage subscription"

The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
5. The phone number and an electronic serial

number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan‐
nels.
Selecting channels
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate‐ You can only listen to enabled channels.
gory.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
5. Select the desired channel. control currently in use.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed. Via the iDrive
6. Select the phone number to have the 1. "Radio"
channel enabled. 2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate‐
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
You can unsubscribe from the channels again

via this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels

1. "Radio" Via the button on the radio
2. "Satellite radio" Press the button.
3. Open "Options". The next channel is selected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
169
Entertainment Radio
Via direct channel entry Selecting a category

1. "Radio" 1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" 2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Set channel" 3. "Category"
4. Turn the controller until the desired chan‐ 4. Select the desired category.
nel is reached and press the controller.
Timeshift
Storing a channel Approx. one hour of the program being broad‐
1. "Radio" cast on the channel currently being listened to
2. "Satellite radio" is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal
must be available.
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐
sired category. The stored audio track can be played with a
delay following the live broadcast. When the
4. Select the desired channel.
buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten.
5. Press the controller again. The buffer is cleared when a new channel is
6. Press the controller again to confirm the selected.
highlighted channel.
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"

The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
The channels can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 22. ▷ The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
Changing the list view ▷ The time difference to the live broadcast is
The list view changes every time the first sym‐ displayed next to the buffer bar.
bol on the navigation bar is pressed.
▷ For live transmissions "live".
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Meaning Timeshift menu
Channel name Symbol Function

Artist Go to the live broadcast
Track Playback/pause
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
170
Radio Entertainment
Symbol Function 4. Select the desired channel.

5. Press the controller again.
Next track
6. Select the artist, track, or game.
Previous track
Storing the league or team
Fast forward
Leagues or teams can be added to the favor‐
Reverse ites from a selection list.
Automatic timeshift deactivated/ 1. "Radio"
activated
3. "Manage favorites"
Automatic timeshift
4. "Add sports information"
When the function is activated, audio playback
is stopped automatically in the event of:
▷ Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.
▷ Activation of the voice activation system.
▷ Muting.
The audio playback then continues with a time
delay.
To activate:
1. "Radio" 5. Select the league.

2. "Satellite radio" 6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift" Opening the favorites
To deactivate: If an activated favorite is played back, the fol‐
lowing message appears for approx. 20 sec‐
"Automatic time shift" onds "Favorite alert!".
Storing favorites "Favorites"
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favor‐ Select the symbol while the message is
ites list. Available favorites are artist, track, shown.
game, league, and team.
Storing the artist, track, or game

It is only possible to store favorites that are
currently being broadcast. The channel infor‐
mation must be available.
1. "Radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the de‐ The displayed favorite is played.
sired category.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
171
Entertainment Radio
If there is no message, the system changes to Information for the selected region is broad‐
the My Favorites category. All favorites cur‐ cast as soon as it is available.
rently being broadcast can be selected from a A new panel opens.
list.
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Managing the favorites Symbol Meaning
Activating/deactivating the favorites Information will be broadcast

shortly.
Favorites can be activated and deactivated
globally and individually. Information is currently being
broadcast.
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor‐ Jump.
ites.
The setting is stored for the remote control Automatic update
currently in use. About twice a year, Sirius performs an update
of the channel names and positions. The up‐
Deleting favorites date takes place automatically and may take
1. "Satellite radio" several minutes.
Notes
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
▷ Reception may not be available in some
4. Open "Options".
situations, such as under certain environ‐
5. "Delete entry" mental or topographic conditions. The sat‐
ellite radio has no influence on this.
Traffic Jump ▷ The signal may not be available in tunnels
Traffic and weather information for a selected or underground garages; next to tall build‐
region is broadcast every few minutes. ings; or near trees, mountains or other
powerful sources of radio interference.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio" Stored stations
3. Open "Options".
General information
4. "Set jump"
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur‐ Calling up a station
rently in use. 1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
Activating/deactivating the jump
1. "Radio"
3. "Jump to:"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
172
Radio Entertainment
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"

The list of stored stations is stored for the re‐
mote control currently in use.
The stations can also be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons, refer to page 22.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
173
Entertainment CD/multimedia
CD/multimedia
Vehicle equipment Muting
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running: press the ON/OFF button on the
radio.
special equipment or the country version. This CD/DVD
systems. Playback
Loading the CD/DVD player
Insert the CD/DVD with the printed side up.
Playback begins automatically.
Controls Reading can take a few minutes with com‐
pressed audio files.
Starting playback
A CD/DVD is contained in the CD/DVD player.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
1 Volume, on/off
2 Eject CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD drive
4 Change the entertainment source
5 Change station/track
6 Programmable memory buttons
Symbol Meaning
Sound output
CD/DVD player
Switching on/off
When the ignition is switched off: press Playable formats
ON/OFF button on the radio. ▷ DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL,
DVD audio (video part only), DVD video.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
174
CD/multimedia Entertainment
▷ CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA. 2. Select the desired track to begin playback.
▷ Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC,
M4A.
Audio playback
Selecting the track using the button

Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until
the desired track is played back.
Displaying information on the track

Selecting the track using the iDrive
Audio CDs
If information about a track has been stored, it

is displayed automatically:
Select the desired track to begin playback. ▷ Interpret.

▷ Album track.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files ▷ Number of tracks on the CD/DVD.
Depending on the data, some letters and num‐ ▷ File name of track.
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor‐
rectly. Random playback
1. Select the directory if necessary. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
To change to a higher level directory: move 2. "CD/DVD"
the controller to the left. 3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
175
4. Open "Options". Playback

5. "Random" The video image is displayed on the Control
Display up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h;
in some countries, it is only displayed while the
parking brake is set or the automatic transmis‐
sion is in position P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all 4. "DVD menu"
tracks within the selected directory are played
in random order.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed and the ignition is switched
off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

Video playback
Video menu
Country codes
To open the video menu: turn the controller
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
during playback.
can be played back; also refer to the informa‐
tion on the DVD. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
Code Region Symbol Function
1 USA, Canada Open DVD menu
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Af‐ Starting playback

rica Pause
3 Southeast Asia Stop
4 Australia, Central and South America, Next chapter
New Zealand
Previous chapter
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
Fast forward
6 China
Reverse
0 All regions
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
176
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases Selecting the subtitles

every time the controller is pressed. To stop, The subtitles that are available depend on the
start playback. DVD.
DVD menu 1. Turn the controller during playback.

1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the 2. Open "Options".
video menu. 3. "Subtitles"
2. "DVD menu" 4. Select the desired language or "Do not
The DVD menu is displayed. The display display subtitles".
depends on the contents of the DVD.
3. To select menu items: move the controller
and press it.
To change to the video menu: turn the control‐
ler and press it.
DVD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
the DVD.
Setting the brightness, contrast and color
Selecting the language 1. Turn the controller during playback.
The languages that are available depend on 2. Open "Options".
the DVD. 3. "Display settings"
1. Turn the controller during playback. 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"

is reached and press the controller.
4. Select the desired language. Selecting the zoom

Display the video image on the entire screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
177
3. "Additional options" Notes

4. "Zoom mode"
CD/DVD player
Do not remove the cover
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do
not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise,
severe eye damage can result.◀
CDs and DVDs

Use of CDs/DVDs
Selecting a track ▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs
DVD video: with labels applied, as these can be‐
come detached during playback due
1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is to heat buildup and can cause irrep‐
displayed. arable damage to the device.
2. Open "Options". ▷ Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
3. "Additional options" diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play
CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g., single
4. "Select title"
CDs; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter
5. Select the desired track. may jam and no longer eject.
▷ Do not use combined CDs/DVDs, e.g., DVD
Selecting the camera angle
Plus, as the CDs/DVDs can jam and will no
The availability of a different camera angle de‐ longer eject.◀
pends on the DVD and the current DVD track.
1. Turn the controller during playback. General malfunctions

2. Open "Options". ▷ CD/DVD players have been optimized for
performance in vehicles. In some instances
3. "Additional options"
they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/
4. "Viewing angle" DVDs than stationary devices would be.
5. Select the desired camera angle. ▷ If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every Humidity
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for High levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐
use. tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens,
and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions involving individual CDs/

DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
178
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Music collection

▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with
self-recorded CDs/DVDs are inconsistent Storing music
data creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the blank CD/ General information
DVD. Music tracks from CDs/DVDs and USB devices
▷ Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side can be stored in the music collection on a hard
with a pen intended for this purpose. disc in the vehicle and played from there.
▷ Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com‐
Damage pressed audio format. If available, informa‐
▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and tion on the album, such as the artist, is
moisture. stored as well.
▷ Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. ▷ CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
▷ Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures audio files: the entire content of the
over 122 ℉/50 ℃, high humidity or direct CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the
sunlight. vehicle as an album. The WMA, MP3, M4A,
and AAC formats are stored. Individual
CDs/DVDs with copy protection tracks and directories can be deleted later,
Deleting a track and directory, refer to
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy pro‐
page 183.
tection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
or can only be played to a limited extent. stored but cannot be played back.
Backing up music data
MACROVISION Regularly back up the music data; other‐
This product contains copyrighted technology wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on the
that is based on multiple registered US patents hard disc.◀
and the intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use Music recognition technology and re‐
of this copy protection must be approved by lated data are provided by
Macrovision. Media protected by this product - Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry stand‐
unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision - ard in music recognition technology and re‐
may only be used for private purposes. Copy‐ lated content delivery. For more information,
ing of this technology is prohibited. please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
DTS Digital Surround™ Inc., copyright © 2000, Gracenote up to now.
Gracenote-Software Copyright 2000,
Manufactured under license under Gracenote up to now. This product and service
U.S. Patent Numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; may practice one or more of the following U.S.
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & and other Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
patents granted and registered in the USA and #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192,
worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and
trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the other patents issued or pending. Some serv‐
DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, ices supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. All rights reserved. Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
179
Storing from a CD/DVD 3. "Storing..."

1. Insert a CD or DVD into the CD/DVD
player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
The music collection is displayed and the first 3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
track of the CD/DVD is played back. During the player.
storage process, the tracks are played in se‐ 4. "Continue storing"
quence. Storage of the CD/DVD continues at the begin‐
Observe the following during the storage proc‐ ning of the track at which storage was inter‐
ess: rupted.
Do not switch to the CD/DVD player and do not
remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player Album information
as this will interrupt the storage process. You During storage, information such as the name
can switch to the other audio sources without of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor‐
interrupting the storage process. Tracks from mation is available in the vehicle database or
the current CD/DVD that have already been on the CD.
stored can be called up. To update the database, contact your service
center.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia" Storing from a USB device
2. "CD/DVD" To store music, a suitable device must be con‐
nected to the USB interface in the glove com‐
partment.
▷ Suitable devices: USB mass storage devi‐
ces, such as USB flash drives or MP3 play‐
ers with a USB interface.
▷ Unsuitable devices: USB hard drives, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with mul‐
tiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music
from the Apple iPod/iPhone can be played
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
180
via the USB audio interface in the center 3. "Music search"

armrest.
▷ File systems: standard file systems for
USB devices are supported. The FAT 32
format is recommended.
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 123.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Select the desired category.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
5. Select the desired entry.

▷ Select "A-Z search", refer to page 23,
and input the desired entry.
Playing music ▷ Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select other categories if you wish.
Music search The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
All tracks for which additional information has order.
been stored can be accessed by the music Not all categories need to be selected. For
search. Tracks without additional information example, to search for all tracks by a cer‐
can be called up via the corresponding album, tain artist, call up that artist only. All of the
refer to page 182. tracks by that artist are then displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 7. "Start play"
2. "Music collection" The list of tracks is repeated automatically.
Restarting the music search

"New search"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
181
Music search by voice Albums

Instructions for voice activation system, refer All stored albums, listed in order of their stor‐
to page 25. age dates.
Symbol Format
wheel. Audio CD
2. ›Music search‹ Compressed audio files
3. Open the desired category, e. g., ›Select
artist‹.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select other categories if you wish.
3. Select the desired album.
To select a track directly: ›Title ...‹
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
Say the voice command and the name of the subdirectories of the album are displayed.
desired track in a single command. The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by
the music search, or the album that was se‐
lected last.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Current playback"
4. Change directories if needed to select

tracks.
To go up a level in the directory: move the
controller to the left.
Random playback
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Top 50 2. "Music collection"
The 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
182
3. Open "Options". Deleting an album

4. "Random" An album cannot be deleted while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track and directory

A track cannot be deleted while it is being
Managing music played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track
Albums
from that directory is being played.
Renaming an album 1. "CD/Multimedia"
The name of the album, if available, is automat‐ 2. "Music collection"
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
3. Highlight the directory or track.
name is not available, it can be changed later if
desired. 4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track"
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection" Free memory capacity
3. Highlight the desired album. Display the free memory capacity in the music
4. Open "Options". collection.
5. "Rename album" 1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Music collection
Backing up the music collection

The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB device. Make sure there is enough free
6. Select the letters individually. memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing
up the music collection may take several
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
183
hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the Deleting the music collection

backup during a long trip. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
1. Starting the engine. 2. "Music collection"
2. Connect the USB device to the USB inter‐ 3. Open "Options".
face in the glove compartment, refer to 4. "Delete music collection"
page 123.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection" External devices
5. Open "Options".
At a glance
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
Music interface for smartphones
Bluetooth audio
AUX-IN port
7. "Backup music on USB"
At a glance
▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3
player. The sound is output on the vehicle
loudspeakers.
▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and
volume settings on the audio device. The
tone depends on the quality of the audio
files.
Connecting
Storing the music collection in the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the exist‐
ing music collection in the vehicle is replaced.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Open "Options".
5. "Restore music from USB"
The AUX-IN port is in the center console.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
184
Connect the headphone connector or line-out Connectors for external devices

connector of the device to the AUX-IN port. ▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐
Playback ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on and that are supported by the USB audio inter‐
select a track on the audio device. face.
2. "CD/Multimedia" ▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to
3. If necessary, "External devices" page 205, when equipped with the music
interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or
4. "AUX front"
mobile phones.
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Playback is only possible if no audio device
is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.
Volume
Due to the large number of different audio de‐
The volume of the sound output is dependent
vices available on the market, it cannot be en‐
on the audio device. If this volume differs
sured that every audio device/mobile phone is
markedly from the volume of the other audio
operable on the vehicle.
sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.
Ask your service center about suitable audio
Adjusting the volume devices/mobile phones.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Audio files
2. If necessary, "External devices"
Standard audio files can be played back:
3. "AUX front"
▷ MP3.
4. "Volume"
▷ WMA.
▷ WAV (PCM).
▷ AAC, M4A.
▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.
File system
Standard file systems for USB devices are
supported. The FAT 32 format is recom‐
mended.
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and press the controller.
USB audio interface/music interface

for smartphones
At a glance
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
They can be operated via iDrive.The sound is
output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
185
Connecting Copy protection

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Management (DRM) cannot be played.
Playback
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
The USB audio interface is in the center con‐

sole.
Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB

audio interface
Connect using a flexible adapter cable.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB in‐
terface. The playback starts with the first track.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐ The CD cover belonging to the track may ap‐
ported by the USB audio interface. pear on the Control Display after several sec‐
onds.
Connection of a USB device via the USB
audio interface Track search
Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro‐ Selection is possible via:
tect the USB audio interface and the USB de‐ ▷ Playback lists.
vice against physical damage.
▷ Information: type of music, artist, and, if
Connect the USB device to the USB interface. available, composer, album, track.
After connecting for the first time ▷ Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer.
Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or
type of music, as well as playback lists are Tracks are displayed if they have been saved in
transmitted into the vehicle. This may take the Latin alphabet.
some time, depending on the USB device and
the number of tracks. Starting the track search
During transmission, the tracks can be called 1. "CD/Multimedia"

up via the file directory. 2. "External devices"
3. Select the or symbol.
Number of tracks
4. "Search"
Information from up to four USB devices or for
5. Select the desired category, e.g., "Genre"
approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐
or "Artist".
hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more
than 36,000 tracks are stored, information on All entries are displayed in a list.
existing tracks may be deleted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
186
▷ Open "A-Z search" and input the de‐ Random playback

sired entry. When a letter is entered, The current list of tracks is played back in ran‐
the results are filtered using this letter dom order.
as the first letter. If multiple letters are
entered, all results that contain that se‐ 1. "CD/Multimedia"
quence are displayed. 2. "External devices"
▷ Select the desired entry from the list. 3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐
vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
6. Select other categories if you wish. peratures; refer to the audio device operating
Not all categories need to be selected. For instructions.
example, if all of the tracks by a certain ar‐ Depending on the configuration of the audio
tist are to be displayed, call up that artist files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the
only. All of the tracks by that artist are then files may not play back correctly in each case.
displayed.
7. "Start play" Information on connection
▷ The connected audio device is supplied
Restarting a track search with a max. power of 500 mA if supported
"New search" by the device. Therefore, do not addition‐
ally connect the device to a socket in the
Playback lists vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐
Calling up playback lists. promised.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
1. "CD/Multimedia" nector into the USB interface.
2. "External devices" ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
3. Select the or symbol. lamps to the USB audio interface.
4. "Playlists" ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐
Current playback charge external devices.
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Bluetooth audio
2. "External devices" At a glance
3. Select the or symbol. ▷ Music files on external devices such as au‐
4. "Current playback" dio devices or mobile phones can be
played back via Bluetooth.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
187
Use of a mobile phone as an audio source, The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
refer to page 198. played.
▷ Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.
▷ The sound is output on the vehicle loud‐
speakers.
▷ The volume of the sound output is de‐
pendent on the device. If necessary, adjust
the volume on the device.
▷ Up to four external devices can be paired
with the vehicle.
5. Perform additional steps on the device, re‐
Requirements fer to the device operating instructions: for
instance, search for or connect the Blue‐
▷ The device is suitable. Information at
tooth device or a new device.
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
▷ The device is ready for operation.
on the device display.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the vehicle, refer on the device display.
to page 197, and on the device.
You are prompted by the iDrive or device
▷ Bluetooth presettings must be made on to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.
the device, such as for a connection with‐
7. Enter the passkey and confirm.
out confirmation or visibility; refer to the
device operating instructions.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
of 16 digits is defined as the Bluetooth
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
Pairing and connecting

Pairing a device
ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own
vehicle's occupants and to other road users,
only pair the device while the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio"
4. "Add new phone"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
188
8. Select the desired functions with which the Connecting the device
device is to be connected, for instance 1. "CD/Multimedia"
"Audio".
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)"
9. "OK"
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
If pairing was successful, the device is dis‐

played as connected.
White symbol : the device is active as an
White symbol : the device is active as an
audio source.
audio source.
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 190. Playback
Connecting a specific device General information

A device that has already been paired can be ▷ The display of music track information de‐
connected as an active audio source. pends on the device.
Connecting is not possible when data is ex‐ ▷ Operation can takes place on the device or
changed via a mobile phone connected via iDrive.
Bluetooth.
▷ Playback is interrupted when data is ex‐
changed via a mobile phone connected via
Requirements
Bluetooth.
If necessary, activate the audio connection of
the desired device from the list of paired devi‐ Starting playback
ces.
1. Connect the device.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 2. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" 3. "External devices"
4. Select the desired device from the list of
paired devices.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Configure phone"
7. Activate "Audio".
8. "OK"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
189
4. Select the symbol. 5. Open "Options".

6. "Remove phone from list"
5. Select the desired track from the list, if

necessary.
What to do if...
Playback menu Information on suitable devices can be found
Depending on the particular device, some of at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
the functions may not be available. Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 196.
Symbol Function The device is not supported by the vehicle.
Next track ▷ Perform a software update, refer to

page 191, if needed.
Fast forward: press and hold the
symbol. The device could not be paired or connected.
▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device
Previous music track and the vehicle match? Enter the same
Reverse: press and hold the symbol. passkey on the device and via iDrive.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
Disconnecting the audio connection the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce‐
1. "CD/Multimedia" dure.
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices con‐

nected to the device or vehicle? Delete
3. Highlight the desired device.
connections with other devices if neces‐
4. Open "Options". sary.
5. "Configure phone" ▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
6. "Audio" does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
7. "OK"
snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.
Unpairing a device ▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one device can be con‐
1. "CD/Multimedia"
nected to the vehicle. Unpair the con‐
2. "Bluetooth® (audio)" nected device from the vehicle and pair
3. If necessary, "Bluetooth® audio" and connect only one device.
4. Highlight the device that is to be unpaired. ▷ The device no longer reacts? Switch the
device off and on again.
▷ Repeat the pairing procedure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
190
Music cannot be played back. 3. "Show current version"

▷ Start the program for playing back music Select desired version to display additional in‐
data on the device and select a track on the formation.
device if necessary.
▷ Switch the radio on and off again. Updating software via USB
Music files can only be played back softly. The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷ Adjust the volume settings on the device.
Playback is disturbed when buttons are 1. Store the file for the software-update in the
pressed or by other messages on the device. main director of a USB flash drive.
▷ Switch off the button tones and other sig‐ 2. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB au‐
nal tones on the device. dio interface in the center console. An up‐
date via the USB interface in the glove
Playback is interrupted by a telephone call or
compartment is not possible.
traffic bulletin and is not resumed automati‐
cally. 3. "Settings"
▷ Switch the radio on and off again. 4. "Software update"
Playback is not possible if the mobile phone is 5. "Update software"

connected via Bluetooth Audio while it is also
connected via the USB interface or the snap-in
adapter.
▷ Disconnect one of the two connections; for
example, disconnect the audio connection,
refer to page 190, and restart playback.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available,
please contact the hotline or service center.
6. "Start update"
Software Update 7. "OK"
The vehicle supports various external devices All listed software updates are installed.
depending on the current software version.
With a software update, the vehicle can sup‐ Restoring the previous version
port new mobile phones or new external de‐
The software version prior to the last software
vice, for example.
update can be restored.
▷ USB.
The previous version can only be restored
Software updates and related current infor‐ when the vehicle is stationary.
mation is available at www.bmw.com/
update. 1. "Settings"
2. "Software update"
Displaying the current version 3. "Restore previous version"
The currently installed software is displayed. 4. "OK" Double-click.
1. "Settings" All listed software updates are removed.
2. "Software update"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
191
Note
While the software is being updated or a previ‐
ous version is being restored, BMW Assist, Of‐
fice functions, and the connected devices are
temporarily unavailable. Wait several minutes
for the functions to become available again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
192
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
193
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Communications
All of the options available to you for mobile
communication with family, friends, business
partners, and service providers are described in
this chapter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Communications Telephone
Telephone
Vehicle equipment serve this precaution, you can endanger the
vehicle occupants and other road users.◀
Snap-in adapter
describes equipment that may not be found in The snap-in adapter is used to:
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected ▷ Hold the mobile phone.
special equipment or the country version. This ▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside
systems.
antenna of the vehicle.
This provides for better network reception
and consistent sound quality.
Approved mobile phones

At a glance
Details on which mobile phones and external
The concept devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
ported by the mobile phone preparation pack‐
Mobile phones or other external devices such
age can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/
as audio players can be connected to the vehi‐
bluetooth.
cle via Bluetooth.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ Displaying the vehicle identification
tooth® SIG, Inc. number and software part number
After these devices are paired once, they are The vehicle identification number and software
recognized automatically when the ignition is part number are needed to determine which
switched on as soon as they are in the vehicle mobile phones are supported by the mobile
and can then be operated via iDrive, the but‐ phone preparation package. The software ver‐
tons on the steering wheel, and via voice acti‐ sion of the mobile phone may also be required.
vation.
1. "Telephone"
Depending on their functionality, external devi‐
ces can be used via the vehicle as a telephone 2. Open "Options".
or as an audio source. The telephone functions 3. "Bluetooth® info"
are described in the following. Operating the 4. "Display system information"
audio functions, refer to page 187.
These approved mobile phones with a certain
Up to four external devices can be paired. software version, support the vehicle functions
Certain functions may need to be enabled by described below.
the mobile phone provider or service provider. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile
Using the mobile phone while driving phones or software versions.
Make entries only when traffic and road Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐
conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐
in your hand while you are driving; use the pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.
hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
196
Telephone Communications
A software update, refer to page 191, can be Activating/deactivating Bluetooth

performed if necessary. Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere.
Notes 1. "Telephone"
At high temperatures, the charging function of 2. Open "Options".
the mobile phone may be limited and functions 3. "Bluetooth®"
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
phone.
Pairing/unpairing the mobile

phone
General information
The following functions are available: Additional functions
▷ Use of a mobile phone as a telephone.
Activating/deactivating the additional
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an additional te‐ functions
lephone.
Activate the functions before pairing to be able
▷ Use of a mobile phone as an audio source. to use them in the vehicle. Information on suit‐
▷ Use of an audio device as an audio source, able mobile phones, refer to page 196, that
refer to page 187. support this function.
1. "Telephone"
Requirements
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)"
▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to
page 196. 3. Open "Options".
▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation. 4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on 5. Select the desired additional function.
the mobile phone. ▷ "Additional telephone"
▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be ▷ "Office"
made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐ ▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
nection without confirmation or visibility,
6. "OK"
refer to the mobile phone operating in‐
structions. An additional function cannot be assigned to a
telephone while it is deactivated.
▷ Deactivate Bluetooth audio if necessary.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum Additional telephone
of 16 digits was defined as the Bluetooth
A mobile phone can be used as an additional
passkey. It is only required once for pairing.
telephone.
The additional telephone can be used to ac‐
cept incoming calls, refer to page 200. While a
call is active on the additional telephone, re‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
197
ceived calls are displayed on the Control Dis‐ If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
play. appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
The functions supported by the mobile phone
Audio source and audio device are displayed as symbols
A mobile phone can be used as an audio when paired.
source. White symbol: the function is active.
Gray symbol: the function is inactive.
Pairing and connecting a mobile
phone Symbol Function
Pairing the mobile phone Telephone.
Additional telephone.
ing an unnecessary hazard both to your own
vehicle's occupants and to other road users, Audio source.
only pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is
stationary.◀
Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐
1. "Telephone" hicle at once. Three mobile phones can be
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" connected with the vehicle at once.
3. "Add new phone" If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐

fer to page 199.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played.
Following the initial pairing
4. To perform additional steps on the mobile
▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected
phone, refer to the mobile phone operating
in the vehicle within a short period of time
instructions: for instance, search for or
when the engine is running or the ignition
connect the Bluetooth device or a new de‐
is switched on.
vice.
▷ The phone book entries of the telephone
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
stored on the SIM card or mobile phone
on the mobile phone display.
are transmitted to the vehicle after detec‐
5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle tion, depending on the mobile phone.
on the mobile phone display.
▷ Four mobile phones can be paired.
6. You are prompted by the iDrive or mobile
▷ Specific settings may be necessary in
phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass‐
some mobile phones, e.g., authorization or
key. Enter the passkey and confirm.
a secure connection; refer to the mobile
or phone operating instructions.
Compare the control number on the vehi‐
cle display with the control number on the Connecting a particular mobile phone
mobile phone display. Confirm the control 1. "Telephone"
number on the mobile phone and in the ve‐
hicle.
3. Select the mobile phone that is to be con‐
"OK"
nected.
7. Select the functions for which the mobile
The functions assigned to the mobile phone
phone is to be used.
before unpairing are assigned to the mobile
8. "OK"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
198
phone when it is reconnected. These functions 4. Open "Options".

are deactivated in a mobile phone that is al‐ 5. "Remove phone from list"
ready connected.
Configuring the mobile phone

Additional functions can be activated or deacti‐
vated for paired and connected mobile phones.
1. "Telephone"
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be config‐
ured.
4. Open "Options". What to do if...
5. "Configure phone" Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
6. At least one function must be selected. page 196.
▷ "Telephone" The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
▷ "Additional telephone" nected.
▷ "Audio" ▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in
7. "OK" the vehicle and on the mobile phone.
If a function has already been assigned to an‐ ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
other connected mobile phone, the function is phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
deactivated in that mobile phone and the mo‐ same passkey on the mobile phone and via
bile phone is unpaired when the function is as‐ iDrive.
signed to a new mobile phone.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
Swapping the telephone and the passkey? Repeat the pairing proce‐
additional telephone dure.
The function of the telephone and additional ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
telephone can be swapped automatically. nected to the mobile phone or vehicle? De‐
lete connections with other devices if nec‐
1. "Telephone" essary.
2. "Bluetooth® (phone)" ▷ Is the audio connection activated? Deacti‐
3. "Swap phone/addit. phone" vate the audio connection.
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or
Unpairing the mobile phone does it have only a limited remaining bat‐
1. "Telephone" tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the
snap-in adapter or via the charging cable.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
sible that only one mobile phone can be
unpaired.
connected to the vehicle. Unpair the con‐
nected mobile phone from the vehicle and
pair and connect only one mobile phone.
The mobile phone no longer reacts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
199
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again. If all points in this list have been checked and
▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or the required function is still not available, con‐
low? Do not expose the mobile phone to tact Customer Relations or the service center.
extreme environmental conditions.
The telephone functions are not available.
Controls
▷ Is the mobile phone paired as an additional
telephone and is the additional telephone Adjusting the volume
function deactivated? Activate the func‐
tion.
▷ Is an outgoing call not possible? Connect
the mobile phone as a telephone.
No phone book entries or only some phone
book entries are displayed, or they are incom‐
plete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐ Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card lected. The setting is stored for the remote
are transmitted. control currently in use.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume
book entries with special characters.
of the microphone on the telephone and the
▷ The number of phone book entries to be volume of the called party. Depending on the
stored is too high. mobile phone, the volumes may need to be ad‐
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large, justed. The settings can only be created during
e. g., due to stored information such as a call and must be adjusted separately for each
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐ telephone. The settings are deleted when the
tact. telephone is unpaired.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio 1. "Settings"
source or additional telephone? The mo‐
2. "Tone"
bile phone must be connected as a tele‐
phone. 3. "Volume settings"
The phone connection quality is poor. 4. Select the desired setting: "Microphone"
or "Loudspeak."
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending 5. To adjust: turn the controller.
on the mobile phone. 6. To store: press the controller.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center Incoming call
console.
Receiving calls
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately. If the number of the caller is stored in the
phone book and is transmitted by the network,
the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐
wise, only the phone number is displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
200
If more than one phone number is assigned to 2. "End call"

a contact, only the name of the contact is dis‐
played.
For calls on the additional telephone, the num‐
ber is only displayed if it is transmitted by the
network.
An incoming call to one of the telephones is
automatically rejected if there is an active call
on the other telephone.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering
Entering a phone number
wheel.
Dialing a number
or 1. "Telephone"
"Accept" 2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The phone number can also be entered by
Ending a call voice.
Press the button on the steering Calls with multiple parties

wheel.
General information
or
You can switch between calls or connect two
1. "Telephone" calls to a single conference call. These func‐
tions must be supported by the mobile phone
and service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to

another party
This function might have to be activated by the
service provider and the mobile phone must be
adjusted accordingly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
201
If a second call comes in during an ongoing When terminating a conference call, both calls
call, a call waiting signal is sounded. are ended. If one call is terminated by another
"Accept" party, the other call can be continued.
The call is accepted and the existing call is put

Switching the microphone to mute
on hold.
When a call is active, the microphone can be
Establishing a second call muted.
Establish an additional call during an active 1. "Telephone"

call. 2. "Active calls"
1. "Telephone" 3. "Microphone mute"
2. "Active calls" A microphone that has been switched to mute
3. "Hold" is automatically reactivated:
The existing call is put on hold. ▷ When a new connection is established.

▷ When switching between call parties.
DTMF suffix dialing

DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐
cess to network services or for controlling de‐
vices, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐
swering machine. The DTMF code is needed
for this purpose.
1. "Telephone"
4. Dial the new phone number or select it 2. Select the contact from a list or "Dial
from a list. number".
"Return" 3. "Keypad dialing"
The call on hold is resumed. 4. Enter the DTMF code via iDrive.
Switching between two calls, hold call Phone book

The active call is displayed in color.
The call on hold is displayed in gray. Displays
"Swap calls" The phone book accesses the contacts and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
The call on hold is resumed.
has been stored. The entries can be selected
to make a call.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele‐ 1. "Telephone"
phone conference call. 2. "Phone book"
1. Establish two calls. A symbol indicates the storage location of the

contacts.
2. "Conference call"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
202
Redialing
General information
The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone
is transmitted to the vehicle depending on the
mobile phone. Possibly only those numbers
are displayed that were dialed from the vehicle.
The 20 phone numbers dialed last are dis‐
played. The sorting order of the phone num‐
bers depends on the particular mobile phone.
Calling a contact
Dialing a number via the instrument
Symbol Meaning
cluster
Contact with one stored phone This is possible if a call is not currently active.
number.
Contact with more than one stored 1. Press the button on the steering
phone number. wheel.
2. Select the desired phone number.
Call not possible; mobile phone
without reception or network, or The connection is established.
Service Request is active.
Dialing the number via the iDrive
For contacts with one stored phone number: 1. "Telephone"
select the required contact. The connection is 2. "Redial"
being established.
For contacts with more than one stored phone
number: select the required contact and the
phone number. The connection is being estab‐
lished.
Editing a contact
Changing the entries in "Contacts". When a
contact is changed, the changes are not stored
on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is 3. Select the desired entry and the phone
stored in the vehicle. number if necessary.
1. Highlight the contact. The connection is established.
2. Open "Options".
Deleting a single entry or all entries
3. "Edit entry"
The deletion of entries depends on your par‐
The contact can be edited.
ticular mobile phone.

2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
203
Saving an entry in the contacts Saving an entry in the contacts

1. Highlight the entry. 1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options". 2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing 3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact" contact"
4. Select the contact if necessary. 4. Select the contact if necessary.
5. Select the type of number: "Home", 5. Select the type of number: "Home",
"Business", "Mobile" or "Other" "Business", "Mobile" or "Other"
6. Complete the entries if necessary. 6. Complete the entries if necessary.
7. "Store contact" 7. "Store contact"
Received calls Hands-free system
Displaying calls General information

The 20 calls that were last received are dis‐ Calls that are being made on the hands-free
played. system can be continued on the mobile phone
and vice versa.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls" From the mobile phone to the hands-
free system
Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth
range of the vehicle can be continued on the
hands-free system with the ignition switched
on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the system
automatically switches to the hands-free sys‐
tem.
If the system does not switch over automati‐
cally, follow the instructions on the mobile
Calling a number from the list phone display; refer also to the mobile phone
Selecting an entry. operating instructions.
The connection is established.
From the hands-free system to the
Deleting a single entry or all entries mobile phone
The deletion of entries depends on your par‐ Calls that are made on the hands-free system
ticular mobile phone. can in some cases be continued on the mobile
phone; this depends on the mobile phone.
Follow the instructions on the mobile phone
2. Open "Options". display; refer also to the mobile phone operat‐
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list" ing instructions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
204
Snap-in adapter 3. To remove the snap-in adapter: press but‐

ton 1.
General information
More information on compatible snap-in
adapters that support the functions of the mo‐
bile phone is available at the service center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and functions
may not be executed.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
note the operating instructions of the mobile
Inserting the mobile phone
phone. 1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the antenna con‐
Installation position nector and from the USB connection of the
mobile phone.
In the center armrest.
2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mo‐
Inserting/removing the snap-in bile phone up toward the electrical con‐
adapter tacts and press it down until it engages.
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
The battery is charged beginning with the

radio ready state of the vehicle.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐
row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐
gages.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
205
Removing the mobile phone
Press the button and remove the mobile

phone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
206
Office Communications
Office
Vehicle equipment phones, data access must be confirmed on
the mobile phone.
▷ The time, time zone, and date, refer to
page 75, are correctly set on the Control
Display and on the mobile phone, for in‐
stance to correctly display appointments.
special equipment or the country version. This ▷ Office is activated, refer to page 197.
systems. Updating
When using the features and systems descri‐ Data are updated every time the mobile phone
bed here, adhere to local regulations. is connected to the vehicle. Appointment en‐
tries, tasks, notes and reminders can be up‐
dated separately.
At a glance 1. "Office"
2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks",
General information "Notes" or "Reminders"
Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text
3. Open "Options".
messages, and e-mails from the mobile phone
can be displayed on the Control Display if the 4. "Update data"
mobile phone provides compatible support of Mobile phone data are transmitted again to
these functions and the necessary Bluetooth the vehicle.
standards.
Information about which mobile phones sup‐
port the Office functions can be found at Office information
www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. A limited num‐
The number of unread messages and active
ber of compatible mobile phones is available
tasks as well as the upcoming appointments
for Office.
are displayed.
Contents are only displayed in full length when
the vehicle is stationary. 1. "Office"
The mobile phone has read-access only. 2. "Current office"

3. Select the desired entry to display details.
Do not use Office while driving
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other road users, never at‐
tempt to use the controls or enter information
unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀
Requirements
▷ A suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle and connected. In some mobile
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
207
Communications Office
Contacts Dialing phone numbers

1. Select the desired contact.
Note 2. Select the phone number.
Equipment version with the mobile phone The connection is established.
preparation package.
Editing a contact
At a glance
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
2. "Edit contact"
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone num‐
bers can be dialed.
Displaying contacts
General information
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts" 3. Change the entries.
4. "Store contact in vehicle"
When a contact is edited, the changes are not
stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the en‐
try is stored in the vehicle.
Selecting the contact as a navigation

destination
2. Select the address.
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
When contacts from the mobile phone are
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
used, the address may need to be matched
search is offered, refer to page 23.
to the navigation data contained in the ve‐
A symbol indicates the storage location of the hicle. In this case:
contacts.
Correct the address.
Symbol Storage location 3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
destination"
No sym‐ In the vehicle; the address has not
bol been checked as a destination.
Checking the address as a destination
In the vehicle; the address has An address that is to be used for destination
been checked as a destination. guidance must match the navigation data con‐
Mobile phone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
208
tained in the vehicle. The address can be If necessary, "Accept address".

checked for this purpose. 9. "Store contact in vehicle"
1. Select the desired contact and highlight
the address. Contact types
2. Open "Options". Various contact types can be assigned to
phone numbers and addresses.
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary. Symbol Meaning
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy Home phone number.

of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone. Business phone number.
Mobile phone number.

New contact
Other phone number.
General information Home address.
A contact can have up to 8 phone numbers,
2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses and one Inter‐ Business address.
net address.
1. "Office" Specifying the home address

A home address can be stored. It appears at
2. "Contacts"
the top of the contact list.
3. Open "Options".
1. "Office"
4. "New contact"
2. "Contacts"
3. "Home"
4. Create a contact.
Selecting the sorting order of the

names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
5. The entry fields are still filled with the pre‐ 1. "Office"
vious entries: "Delete input fields" 2. "Contacts"
6. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol 3. Open "Options".
next to the entry field. 4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
7. Enter the text and assign the contact type. last name"
8. If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation Depending on how the contacts were stored
system: enter the address. Only addresses on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the
contained in the navigation data in the ve‐ names may differ from the selected sorting or‐
hicle can be entered. This ensures that der.
destination guidance is possible for all ad‐
dresses.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
209
Show contact pictures Displaying messages

Pictures stored with the contacts are stored in 1. "Office"
the vehicle when the mobile phone is con‐ 2. "Messages"
nected to the vehicle. The number of transmit‐
A symbol identifies the type of message.
ted pictures depends on the mobile phone.
The mobile phone must support this function. Symbol Message type
1. "Office" Text messages.
2. "Contacts"
My Info
3. Open "Options".
Message from the Concierge serv‐
4. "Configure Bluetooth®"
ice.
5. "Show images"
E-mail from mobile phone.
Display of all contact pictures is activated or
deactivated.
Filtering the message list
Deleting contacts The message list can be filtered if more than
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are one type of message exists.
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
1. "Filter:"
cannot be deleted.
1. "Office"
2. "Contacts"
3. Highlight the contact.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
6. If necessary. "Yes"
2. Select the type of message.

Messages ▷ "All"
General information All messages are displayed.
Whether or not text messages and e-mails ▷ "E-mail"
from the mobile phone are displayed depends Only e-mails from the mobile phone
on whether transmission from the mobile are displayed.
phone to the vehicle is supported. Text mes‐ ▷ "Service message"
sages and e-mails may not be supported by
the service provider, or the function may need Only messages from the BMW Assist
to be enabled separately. After the mobile Concierge service and My Info are dis‐
phone is first paired, transmission may take played.
several minutes. Messages are only displayed ▷ "Text message"
in full length when the vehicle is stationary. Only text messages from the mobile
Messages from the additional telephone are phone are displayed.
not transmitted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
210
Deleting messages My Info

Messages from the Concierge service and
My Info can be deleted. Selecting additional functions
Delete a message: Additional functions are available when a mes‐
sage is selected.
1. "Office"
Sym‐ Function
2. "Messages"
bol
3. Select the desired message.
"Start guidance" or "Add as another
4. Open "Options".
destination"
5. "Delete message"
"Call"
Delete all messages:
If the message contains a number,
1. "Office" the connection is established.
2. "Messages"
"Select phone number"
3. Open "Options".
If the message contains more than
4. "Delete all messages" or "Delete service one number, select the desired
messages" number from the list. The connec‐
tion is established.
Text messages
Calling the sender of a text message Message from the Concierge service
Storing an address
Saving the sender in the contacts 2. Open "Options".
1. Highlight the desired message. 3. "Store contact in vehicle"
2. Open "Options".
Selecting additional functions
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
Additional functions are available when a mes‐
contact"
sage is selected:
Using contact data Sym‐ Function

Contact data from appointments, tasks, text bol
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or "Start guidance" or "Add as another
selected, refer to page 214. destination"
Reading the text message out loud "Call"

Read the text message out loud, refer to If the message contains a number,
page 214. the connection is established.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
211
Sym‐ Function 3. Open "Options".

bol 4. "Fully download e-mails"
"Select phone number" Only a part of the e-mail from the mobile
phone is loaded into the vehicle.
If the message contains more than
one number, select the desired
Reading the e-mail out loud
number from the list. The connec‐
tion is established. Read the e-mail out loud, refer to page 214.
"Further information"
Display additional information. Calendar
Display the calendar
E-mail
Appointments during the last 20 days and the
Displaying e-mails next 50 days can be displayed.
1. "Office" 1. "Office"
2. "Messages" 2. "Calendar"
3. Select the desired e-mail. The appointments on the current day are
displayed.
Displaying e-mail contacts
If the sender and recipient of an e-mail are Selecting the calendar day
transmitted by the mobile phone, this informa‐ 1. Select the date.
tion is displayed in the e-mail.
"Sender/Recipient"
If the e-mail addresses are stored in the con‐
tacts, the contact is displayed. Select the con‐
tact to display details.
If the e-mail addresses are not stored in the
contacts, only the e-mail address is displayed.
Using contact data

Contact data from appointments, tasks, text 2. Select the desired day or date.
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or ▷ "Next day"
selected, refer to page 214. ▷ "Date:"
Deactivating the full display ▷ "Previous day"
When an e-mail is opened in the vehicle, the e- ▷ "Today"

mail is fully transmitted to the vehicle. This
may result in charges. Display the appointment
1. Select the desired appointment.
1. "Office"
2. Scroll through the appointment if neces‐
2. "Messages" sary:
▷ Turn the controller.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
212
▷ Select the symbol. Using contact data

Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
Using contact data messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text selected, refer to page 214.
messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
selected, refer to page 214. Reading the task out loud
Read the task out loud, refer to page 214.
Reading the appointment out loud
Read the appointment out loud, refer to
page 214. Notes
Displaying notes
Tasks 1. "Office"
2. "Notes"
Displaying the task list
All notes are displayed.
Display tasks that are due within the next
90 days.
Displaying the note
1. "Office" 1. Select the desired note.
2. "Tasks"
Sorting the task list

1. Select the header in the task list.
2. Scroll in the note if necessary:

2. Select the sorting criterion: Using contact data

▷ "Priority (!)" Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
▷ "Subject" messages, e-mails, and notes can be saved or
▷ "Due date" selected, refer to page 214.
Displaying the task Reading the note out loud

1. Select the desired task. Read the note out loud, refer to page 214.
2. Scroll in the task if necessary:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
213
Reminders Reading out loud

Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries,
Displaying reminders
tasks, and notes can be read out loud.
Reminders of pending appointments and tasks
are displayed. After an appointment or after a 1. Select the desired message, appointment,
task is due, the reminder is no longer dis‐ task, or note.
played. 2. Select the symbol.
1. "Office" The following options are available during
reading:
2. "Reminders"
▷ "Pause"
3. Select the desired reminder.
Interrupt reading. Select again to restart
The corresponding appointment or the task
reading.
are displayed.
▷ "Back to beginning"
Start reading the message again from the
Using contact data beginning.
At a glance
Go back one paragraph.
Contact data from appointments, tasks, text
messages, emails, and notes can be stored or
selected. Skip a paragraph.
▷ To end reading, turn the controller to the
Displaying contact or selecting phone left.
number
1. "Use contact data"
2. Display the contact or select the phone What to do if...
number: Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to
▷ Select the contact to display contact page 196.
details. Appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, or
▷ Select the phone number to establish a e-mails from the mobile phone are not dis‐
connection directly. played.
▷ The mobile phone is not capable of the
Storing contact data missing function or is not connected cor‐
1. "Use contact data" rectly.
2. Highlight the phone number or e-mail ad‐ ▷ The Office function is deactivated.
dress. ▷ The mobile phone is connected as an addi‐
3. Open "Options". tional phone.
4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new ▷ Appointments are older than 20 days or
contact" are more than 50 days in the future.
▷ The tasks have been marked as completed
or have a due date that lies more than
90 days in the future.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
214
▷ Depending on the number of stored ap‐

pointments, task notes, and messages in
the mobile phone, not all are displayed in
the vehicle.
Not all appointments and tasks from the mo‐
bile phone are displayed at the right time?
▷ The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly
set on the Control Display and mobile
phone.
The e-mail attachment is not displayed.
▷ E-mails are transmitted without an attach‐
ment.
Entries are not displayed in full length.
▷ Text were already transmitted from the
mobile phone in a shortened form.
▷ Synchronization between the mobile
phone and vehicle may take several mi‐
nutes.
The contact pictures are not being displayed?
▷ Up to 200 contact pictures can be stored in
the vehicle.
The E-mail is displayed with a delay?
▷ Check the e-mail settings on the telephone
and adjust if necessary.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available,
please contact the hotline or service center.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
215
Communications Contacts
Contacts
Vehicle equipment 3. The entry fields are still filled with the pre‐
vious entries: "Delete input fields"
4. Fill in the entry fields: select the symbol
next to the entry field.
systems.
Note 5. Enter the text, refer to page 23.
Equipment version without the mobile phone In vehicles equipped with a navigation sys‐
preparation package. tem: it is only possible to enter addresses
that are contained in the vehicle navigation
data. This ensures that destination guid‐
ance is possible for all addresses.
General information
6. If necessary, "Store"
Contacts can be created and edited. The con‐
tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as
well if this function is supported by the mobile
Specifying the home address
phone. The addresses can be adopted as des‐
tinations for navigation and the phone num‐ A home address can be stored. It appears at
bers can be dialed. the top of the contact list.
1. "Home"
2. Create a contact.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
My contacts
General information
List of all contacts stored in the vehicle.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
216
Contacts Communications
2. "My contacts" 4. Move the controller to the left.

5. "Yes"
If a contact from the mobile phone is edited,
the changes are not stored on the mobile
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the ve‐
hicle, and only this copy is displayed. Under
certain circumstances, a contact entry with the
same name is created.
Selecting the contact as a navigation

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. destination
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z 1. Select the desired contact.
search is offered, refer to page 23. 2. Select the address.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the When contacts from the mobile phone are
contacts: used, the address may need to be matched
Symbol Storage location to the navigation data contained in the ve‐
hicle. In this case:
No sym‐ In the vehicle; the address has not
Correct the address.
bol been checked as a destination.
3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
In the vehicle; the address has destination"
been checked as a destination.
Checking the address as a destination
Mobile phone.
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con‐
Dialing a phone number tained in the vehicle. The address can be
1. Select the desired contact. checked for this purpose.
2. Select the phone number. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight
The connection is established. the address.
2. Open "Options".
Editing a contact
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address if necessary.
2. "Edit contact"
If the address is corrected and stored, a copy
of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not
changed on the mobile phone.
Selecting the sorting order of the

names
Names can be displayed in a different order.
1. "My contacts"
2. Open "Options".
3. Change the entries.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
217
Communications Contacts
3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,

last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored
on the mobile phone, the sorting order of the
names may differ from the selected sorting or‐
der.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
218
ConnectedDrive Communications
ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment Concierge service
General information
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also The Concierge service offers information on
describes equipment that may not be found in events, gas stations, and hotels, and provides
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected phone numbers and addresses. Hotels can be
special equipment or the country version. This booked directly using the Concierge service.
also applies to safety-related functions and The Concierge service is part of the optional
systems. Convenience Plan.
Starting the Concierge service
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
TeleService
General information
TeleService supports communication with
your service center.
▷ Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the service center.
In this way, the service center can plan its
work in advance. This shortens the dura‐
tion of the service appointment. 3. "Start service"
▷ In the event of a breakdown, data on the A voice connection is established with the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to Concierge service. Phone numbers and ad‐
Roadside Assistance. dresses can be transmitted to the vehicle.
▷ The service varies by country.
▷ Connection costs may ensue.
▷ Services may be restricted abroad.
Messages
Information on messages, refer to page 210.
Requirements
Different variants of TeleService may be imple‐
mented in the vehicle. The following condi‐ Roadside Assistance
tions must always be met:
▷ Wireless reception is available. At a glance
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
▷ A current ConnectedDrive subscription or down.
a vehicle equipped with intelligent Emer‐
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
gency Request.
a Check Control message, refer to page 80.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
219
Communications ConnectedDrive
Starting Roadside Assistance without After the data are transmitted, the voice con‐
TeleService nection to Roadside Assistance is re-estab‐
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" lished.
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The Roadside Assistance number is dis‐ BMW Online
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a
connection is established to Roadside As‐ At a glance
sistance.
A business search can be opened via BMW
Online.
License conditions
This product contains NetFront Browser soft‐
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
NetFront is a trademark or registered trade‐
mark of ACCESS CO., LTD., in Japan and
other countries.
This software is based in part on the work of
Starting Roadside Assistance with the Independent JPEG Group.
TeleService
Requirements
General information ▷ Subscription to the optional Convenience
In vehicles equipped with TeleService, support Plan.
is first offered by TeleService Diagnosis and
▷ The date setting on the Control Display is
then, if necessary, by TeleService Help.
current.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" ▷ The vehicle is located within wireless net‐
2. "Roadside Assistance" work coverage.
3. "Start service"
Starting BMW Online
2. "BMW Online"
TeleService Diagnosis
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are 3. If necessary, "OK"
important for vehicle diagnosis. These data are The BMW Online home page is displayed.
transmitted automatically.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
220
Operating BMW Online Vehicle equipped with TeleService

To start a search: 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
▷ Turn the controller to highlight an element. 2. "Customer Relations"
▷ Press the controller to display an element. 3. "Start service"
Opening the start page

1. Open "Options". Service Request
2. "Display start page"
At a glance
Sends information to your service partner to
request the arrangement of a service appoint‐
ment. The TeleService data is transmitted dur‐
ing a Service Request. If possible, your service
partner will establish contact with you.
Starting a Service Request

2. "Service Request"
Loading a new page 3. "Start service"
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Cancel
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
A Service Request can be started via a Check
At a glance Control message, refer to page 80.
Contact Customer Relations for information on

all aspects of your vehicle.
Automatic Service Request
Calling Customer Relations The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your serv‐
Vehicle not equipped with TeleService ice partner prior to the service deadline. If pos‐
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" sible, the service partner will contact you and a
service appointment can be arranged.
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis‐
played. If the mobile phone is paired, a connec‐
tion is established to Customer Relations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
221
Communications ConnectedDrive
To check when your service partner was noti‐ 3. "Available services"

fied:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
Updating BMW Assist

Manual update of TeleService.
3. Open "Options". 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
4. "Last Service Request" 2. "Service Status"

3. "Update BMW Assist"
TeleService Report
Transmits technical data when needed from
your vehicle to BMW at regular intervals; these Data transfer
are evaluated for the continued development
During the updating of BMW services, display
of BMW products.
the status of the data transfer.
TeleService Report is activated in vehicles that
meet certain technical conditions and that 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"
have a current ConnectedDrive subscription; it 2. Open "Options".
is free of charge. 3. "Data transfer"
Neither personal nor position data are trans‐
mitted.
To check when your service partner was noti‐ Apps
fied:
At a glance
1. "Vehicle Info"
Certain software applications of a suitable mo‐
2. "Vehicle status" bile phone can be integrated in the vehicle.
3. "Options" These software applications are displayed on
4. "Last Teleservice Info" the Control Display.
They are operated via iDrive.
Services status Requirements

▷ The mobile phone is suitable.
Displaying available services ▷ The mobile phone operating system sup‐
Display of all services available in the vehicle. ports the software applications of Apps.
1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive" ▷ Software applications are installed on the
mobile phone and ready to use.
2. "Service Status"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
222
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract. ▷ Some mobile phones cannot simultane‐

Any additionally incurred costs are not a ously use Apps and the Bluetooth hands-
part of Apps. free system.
▷ Use only BMW approved software applica‐ If necessary, restart the software applica‐
tions; otherwise, it may result in malfunc‐ tion on the mobile phone after a phone
tions. conversation.
Information about suitable mobile phones,

available software applications and their instal‐
lation can be found at www.bmw.com/connec‐ Remote Services
tivity or at the service center. With Remote Services, a connection can be
Create the entries. established between a mobile phone and the
vehicle. This connection can be used, for ex‐
Make entries only when traffic and road
ample, to lock and unlock the vehicle.
conditions allow. Otherwise, the vehicle occu‐
pants and other road users may be put in dan‐ Depending on the vehicle, additional functions
ger because of the distraction from driving. may be available.
For reasons of safety, some software applica‐ To be able to use the functions, the My BMW
tions are usable only while the vehicle is sta‐ Remote app must be downloaded. Operation
tionary.◀ takes place via the app.
Alternatively, the functions can also be used
Operating Apps via the ConnectedDrive Hotline.
1. Connect the mobile phone via the snap-in The operating instructions for the My BMW
adapter or via the USB audio interface. Remote app can be found on the Connected‐
Drive portal or at www.bmw.com.
2. "ConnectedDrive"
3. Select the desired software application.
Displaying status
Information about the currently available soft‐
ware applications can be displayed.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW apps"
Notes
▷ The ranges of Apps that can be displayed
on the Control Display depend on the
range of installed software applications on
the mobile phone.
▷ The data transmission of the software ap‐
plications from the mobile phone to the ve‐
hicle can last some time. Some software
applications depend on the speed of the
available Internet connection of the mobile
phone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
223
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment Fuel cap
Opening
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
describes equipment that may not be found in flap.
systems.
General information
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Refuel promptly
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
At the latest, refuel at a range below
to the fuel filler flap.
30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function
is not ensured and damage may occur.◀
Notes
Switch off the engine before refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu‐
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the
tank and a message will be displayed.◀
Observe when handling fuel Closing

▷ Take all precautionary measures and 1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until
observe all applicable regulations you clearly hear a click.
when handling fuel.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in
your vehicle. They can develop a leak and Do not pinch the retaining strap
cause an explosion or cause a fire in the Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
event of an accident.◀ to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be
closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
A message is displayed if the cap is loose or

missing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
226
Refueling Mobility
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap Fuel tank capacity

In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.6 US gal/
can be released manually:
63 liters.
1. Press the cover out of the cargo area side

panel at the rear and remove it.
2. Take the button with the fuel pump symbol
out of the holder toward the front and pull.
This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when

refueling
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature pump shutoff.
▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,
escaping fuel may harm the environment or
damage the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Follow the safety instructions provided at
gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of
personal injury and property damage.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
227
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle equipment Do not refuel with ethanol E85
Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an
ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as
this would damage the engine and fuel supply
system.◀
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you
special equipment or the country version. This can refuel with different recommended fuel
also applies to safety-related functions and grades.
systems.
When using the features and systems descri‐ Recommended fuel grade
bed here, adhere to local regulations. BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade

Fuel recommendation BMW recommends AKI 89.
Minimum fuel grade
Gasoline
For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should Do not fill up with fuel below the speci‐
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. fied minimum quality; otherwise, the engine
may not run properly.◀
Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel
pump as containing metals. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with‐
when starting at high outside temperatures.
out metal additives
This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline
with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron; Minimum fuel grade
otherwise, the catalytic converter and other The use of poor-quality fuels may result
components will be permanently damaged.◀ in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling. ronmental conditions such as high ambient
The ethanol should fulfill the following quality temperature and high altitude, may occur.
standards: If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
US: ASTM 4806–xx ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
xx: always adhere to the currently applicable
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
standard.
purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐
ers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
228
Fuel Mobility
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
229
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle equipment Tires warm up during driving and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases as the temperature
This chapter describes all series equipment as rises. The tire inflation pressure specifications
well as country-specific and special equipment apply to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera‐
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also ture.
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle
has been parked for at least 2 hours.
systems.
The values displayed by tire inflation stations
may be up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi too low.
For the Flat Tire Monitor: after adjusting the
tire inflation pressure to a new value, reinitialize
the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 91.
Tire inflation pressure
For the Tire Pressure Monitor: after adjusting
Safety information the tire inflation pressure to a new value, reset
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 94.
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires Pressure specifications
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐ The tables below provide all the correct infla‐
sure. tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at
ambient temperature.
Checking the pressure The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes
Tires naturally lose pressure uniformly across approved and tire brands recommended by
all four tires. BMW; a list of these is available from your
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the service center.
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of For correct identification of the right tire infla‐
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle tion pressures, observe the following:
has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is
▷ Maximum allowable driving speed.
higher.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Tire inflation pressures for driving up
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ to 100 mph or 160 km/h
sure and correct it as needed: at least twice a For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
serve this precaution, you may be driving on pressures listed on the following pages in the
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/
that may not only compromise your vehicle's 160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
and the risk of an accident.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
230
Wheels and tires Mobility
These tire inflation pressures can also be not exceed this speed or else there is a risk of
found on the driver's side door pillar when the tire damage and accidents.◀
driver's door is open.
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
Adjust the tire inflation pressures
To drive at maximum speeds in excess of
100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐
spective tire inflation pressures listed on the
following pages in the column for traveling
speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or
160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci‐
Do not exceed the maximum permissible dents could occur.◀
speed
Observe all national and local maximum speed
The permissible maximum speed for these tire limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Do occur.
Tire inflation pressures X1 sDrive28i
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications in

bar/PSI
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/PSI with

cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38

225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 2.4/35 2.8/41

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.4/35 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.6/38
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
231

bar/PSI
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 2.8/41
Compact wheel: Speeds of up to 50 mph/

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

Without high-speed tuning feature

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 2.4/35 2.9/42

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.4/35 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 2.9/42

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
With high-speed tuning feature
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
232

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC 2.4/35 2.9/42

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 W RSC 2.6/38 3.1/45

225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.8/41 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 3.1/45

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressures X1 xDrive28i/X1 xDrive35i
Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38

225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 2.4/35 2.8/41

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
233

bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.4/35 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.6/38
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 2.8/41

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

Without high-speed tuning feature

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S A/S RSC 2.4/35 2.9/42

225/50 R 17 94 H RSC
225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC 2.6/38 3.1/45

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC
225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 2.6/38 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 2.9/42

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
With high-speed tuning feature
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
234

bar/PSI

cold tires.
225/50 R 17 94 V RSC 2.6/38 3.0/44

225/50 R 17 94 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 18 91 W RSC 2.8/41 3.2/46

225/45 R 18 91 H M+S RSC
Front: 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 2.8/41 -

Rear: 255/40 R 18 95 V RSC - 3.0/44
Front: 225/40 R 19 89 W RSC 3.0/44 -

Rear: 255/35 R 19 92 W RSC - 3.2/46

T 135/80 R 17 102 M 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire identification marks W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the
tire makes it easier to identify and choose the
Tire Identification Number
right tires.
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
Tire size the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V DOT code:
225: nominal width in mm DOT xxxx xxx 2313
45: aspect ratio in % xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
R: radial tire code xxx: tire size and tire design
17: rim diameter in inches 2313: tire age
91: load rating, not for ZR tires
Tire age
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
The tire manufacturing date is contained in the
tire identification mark: DOT ... 2313 means
Speed letter
that the tire was manufactured in the
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h week 23 of 2013.
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h BMW recommends that you replace all tires af‐
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h ter 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h for 10 years.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
235
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Temperature

Quality grades can be found where applicable The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
and maximum section width. For example: generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
Treadwear 200 Traction AA heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Temperature A
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
DOT Quality Grades life, and excessive temperature can lead to
Treadwear sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Traction AA A B C to a level of performance which all passenger
Temperature A B C car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
Conform to Federal Safety Requirements and A represent higher levels of performance
All passenger car tires must conform to on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to required by law.
these grades.◀ Temperature grade for this tire
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
Treadwear tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ in combination, can cause heat buildup and
ernment test course. For example, a tire possible tire failure.◀
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course
RSC – Run-flat tires
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ page 239.
ing habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate. M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
Traction These have better winter properties than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, summer tires.
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to XL
stop on wet pavement as measured under Designation for specially reinforced tires.
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance. Tire tread
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, Summer tires
and does not include acceleration, cornering, Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 0.12 in/3 mm.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
236
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. fects:
▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.
Winter tires
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than dency to pull to the left or right.
0.16 in/4 mm.
Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are road damage and similar situations.
less suitable for winter operation.
In case of tire damage
Minimum tread depth If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
duce your speed immediately and have the
wheels and tires checked right away; other‐
wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the next service center or tire
shop.
If necessary, have the vehicle towed.
Otherwise, tire damage can present a life-
threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and
other road users.◀
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ Repair of tire damage
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
your vehicle recommends that you do not have
They are marked on the side of the tire with damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
sult.◀
Tire damage
General information
Changing wheels and tires
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Mounting
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Information on mounting tires
Notes Have mounting and balancing performed
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, only by a service center or tire specialist.
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles If this work is not carried out properly, there is
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and the danger of subsequent damage and related
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur safety hazards.◀
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be Wheel and tire combination
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
nation and rim version for your vehicle can be
with low-profile tires.
obtained from the service center.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
237
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair Recommended tire brands

the function of a variety of systems such as
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible.
Approved wheels and tires
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
mends that you use only wheels and tires that
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
have been approved for your particular vehicle
model. With proper use, these tires meet the highest
standards for safety and handling.
For example, despite having the same official
size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐
tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. Retreaded tires
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires.
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
Retreaded tires
cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐
cle if they are mounted.◀ Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
limit service life and have a negative impact on
Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire road safety.◀
Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or changing from
Winter tires
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures
a flat tire, refer to page 93. Your service center below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.
will be glad to advise you. Although so-called all-season M+S tires do
provide better winter traction than summer
tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐
formance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then display a corresponding sign in the field
of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire
specialist or from your service center.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
238
Maximum speed for winter tires The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
Do not exceed the maximum speed for remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐ event of a pressure loss.
cidents can occur.◀
Driving with a damaged tire:
▷ Flat Tire Monitor FTM, refer to page 91
Run-flat tires
▷ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM, refer to
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires.
page 93
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
Changing run-flat tires
Rotating wheels between axles
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
The manufacturer of your vehicle advises
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
against swapping wheels between the front
Your service center will be glad to advise you.
and rear axles.
This can impair the handling characteristics.
Rotating the tires is not permissible when us‐ Snow chains
ing different types of tires.
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
Storage
recommended. Consult your service center for
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with more information.
as little exposure to light as possible.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, the rear wheels only.
grease and fuels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow
chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument
Run-flat tires might issue an incorrect reading.
Label When driving with snow chains, it can be bene‐

ficial to temporarily activate DTC, refer to
page 98.
RSC label on the tire sidewall.

The wheels are composed of special rims and
tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐
gree.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
239
Mobility Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Coolant expansion tank 244 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
3 Filler neck for washer fluid for the head‐ engine oil
lamp and window washer system 65
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
240
Engine compartment Mobility
Hood Closing the hood
Opening the hood

Working in the engine compartment
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the
necessary professional technical training.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a service center.
Drop the hood from a height of ap‐
If this work is not carried out properly, there is prox. 16 in/40 cm. It must be clearly heard to
the danger of subsequent damage and related engage.
safety hazards.◀
Hood open when driving
Risk of damage If you see any signs that the hood is not
Before opening the hood, ensure that the completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto mediately and close it securely.◀
the window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
Danger of pinching
1. Pull the lever.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
Engine oil
General information
Engine oil consumption depends on the driv‐
ing style and the conditions of use. A highly
sporty driving style, for example, results in
2. Lift the hood all the way. considerably higher engine oil consumption.
3. Press the release handle and open the Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
hood. after refueling.
Depending on the engine, the vehicle uses
electronic oil measurement or dip stick meas‐
urement.
Checking the engine oil level

Your car is equipped with an electronic engine
oil level check.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
241
Requirements Symbol Function

▷ The engine must be running and warm af‐
Oil at minimum level:
ter the vehicle has been driven for at least
6.2 miles/10 km. Add a maximum quantity of
1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil,
▷ The vehicle is stopped or being driven on a
refer to page 243, at the next
level roadway.
opportunity.
Display in the instrument cluster Oil level is too high.
1. Lightly press button 1 in the turn indicator Overfilling oil damages the en‐
lever up or down repeatedly until the ap‐ gine. Have the vehicle
propriate symbol appears in the display, checked immediately.
accompanied by the word "OIL".
The oil level sensor is defec‐
tive.
Do not add engine oil.
It is possible to continue driv‐
ing. Note the newly calculated
remaining mileage until the
next oil service, refer to
page 78. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.
The oil level is checked and the reading
Display via iDrive
displayed.
1. "Vehicle Info"
Possible displays 2. "Vehicle status"
Symbol Function
Oil level OK.
Oil level is being checked.

This can take about 3 minutes
3. "Engine oil level"
if the car is at a standstill on a
level surface, or about 5 mi‐
Possible messages
nutes while the car is on the
move. ▷ "Engine oil level OK"
▷ "Measurement not possible at this time."
▷ "Measuring engine oil level..."
Duration with the engine running: ap‐
prox. 3 minutes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
242
Engine compartment Mobility
Duration while driving: approx. 5 minutes. Too much engine oil

If engine oil was added, it may take up to Have the vehicle checked immediately;
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading. otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐
▷ "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 age.◀
quart!"
Protect children
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 li‐
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
ter of engine oil at the next opportunity, re‐
dren and heed the warnings on the containers
fer also to Adding engine oil below.
to prevent health risks.◀
▷ "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Oil types for refilling
Too much engine oil
Have the vehicle checked immedi‐ Notes
ately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to en‐ No oil additives
gine damage.◀
Do not use oil additives as these may
▷ "Measurement inactive. Have this cause engine damage.◀
checked." Do not add engine oil. It is possi‐
ble to continue driving. Note the newly cal‐ Viscosity classes of engine oils
culated remaining mileage until the next oil When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
service, refer to page 78. Have the system the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE vis‐
checked as soon as possible. cosity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or
5W-30, or malfunctions or engine damage may
Adding engine oil occur.◀
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of

Filler neck the engine.
Due to national regulations, some oil types are
not available in every country.
Approved oil types
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter
of oil only after a corresponding message ap‐ BMW Longlife-01 FE
pears on the Control Display.
Add oil promptly Further information on approved oil types can
be obtained from the service center.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, engine damage could result.◀ Alternative oil types
If the approved engine oils are not available, up
to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following
specification can be used:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
243
Gasoline engine 3. The filling level indicator 1 in the filler neck

indicates the coolant level. The coolant
API SM or a higher quality standard level is correct if it is between the arrows of
the respective reservoir label 2.
Oil change
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
having the engine oil changed by a service
center.
Coolant
General information
Danger of burns from hot engine 4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant 5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
may cause burns.◀ 6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise, Disposal
engine damage may occur. The additives are
Comply with the appropriate environ‐
harmful to your health.◀
mental protection regulations when dis‐
Coolant consists of water and additives. posing of coolant additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service cen‐
ter for suitable additives.
Checking the coolant level

1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐
wise slightly to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape; then continue turning
to open.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
244
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment Details on the service requirements, refer to
page 78, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
This chapter describes all series equipment as play.
On the Control Display, the remaining distan‐
ces and times for selected maintenance re‐
quirements and any legally required deadlines
can be displayed individually, refer to page 78.
Service data in the remote control
systems.
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures
for your vehicle.
BMW Maintenance System
Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
mote control that you used most recently.
Setting the correct date
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 76; otherwise, the effectiveness of
CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.◀
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
The maintenance system provides information tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
on required maintenance measures and thus count.
provides support in maintaining road safety If this occurs, have a service center update the
and the operational reliability of the vehicle. time-dependent maintenance procedures,
such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
Condition Based Service activated-charcoal filter.
CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ Service and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Information Booklet for US
Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐
mines the maintenance requirements.
models and Warranty and
The system makes it possible to adapt the
Service Guide Booklet for
amount of maintenance you need to your user Canadian models
profile. Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
245
Mobility Maintenance
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
els for additional information on service re‐ circumstances:
quirements. This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
Maintenance and repair should be performed firing in the engine.
by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
ular maintenance procedures recorded in the system checked immediately; otherwise,
vehicle's Service and Warranty Information serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty riod can seriously damage emission con‐
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ converter.
nance.
Display of the previously described
malfunctions on Canadian models.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis Fuel cap
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The indicator lamp lights up.
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may If the fuel cap is not properly tight‐
only be used by the service center, by work‐ ened, the OBD system may conclude
shops that operate according to the specifica‐ that fuel vapor is escaping. If the cap is then
tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro‐ tightened, the display should go out in a short
priately trained personnel, and by other time.
authorized persons. Otherwise, its use may
lead to vehicle malfunctions.◀
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
246
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment Front
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 64.
systems.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm.

Tool kit
3. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and

The tool kit is stowed under the cargo floor fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
panel and storage compartment in the cargo 4. Take the wiper blade out of the catch
area. mechanism toward the front.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order,
making sure it engages.
Wiper blade replacement Risk of damage
Do not fold down the wipers without Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper blades wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades the window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀
have not been installed; this may damage the
windshield.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
247
Mobility Replacing components
Rear Do not perform work/bulb replacement

on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is
carried out improperly.◀
Do not touch the bulbs
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm. Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
and reduce its service life.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
mechanism toward the front.
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Lamp and bulb replacement Light-emitting diodes LED

Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu‐
Notes cent lenses serve as the light source for many
of the controls, displays and other equipment
Lamps and bulbs in your vehicle.
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐
tion to vehicle safety. ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐
tional lasers, are officially designated as
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar with Do not remove the covers
them or they are not described here. Do not remove the covers, and never
You can obtain a selection of replacement stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
bulbs at the service center. otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
Danger of burns
Only change bulbs when they are cool;
Headlamp glass
otherwise, there is the danger of getting Condensation can form on the inside of the
burned.◀ headlamps in cool or humid weather. When
you drive with the lights switched on, the con‐
Working on the lighting system densation evaporates after a short time. The
When working on the lighting system, headlamps do not need to be changed.
you should always switch off the lights af‐ If the condensation in the headlamps does not
fected to prevent short circuits. evaporate after trips with the lights switched
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage on, and the amount of moisture in the head‐
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions lamps increases, for example if water droplets
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ form, have them checked by your service cen‐
ter.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
248
Headlight setting clockwise all the way using a coin, for ex‐
Changing the bulbs and lights may influence ample.
the headlight settings. Have the headlight set‐
ting checked by a service center and corrected
if necessary after changing bulbs or lights.
Removing the headlamp cover

The high beam bulbs can be replaced via the
engine compartment, and the low beam and
turn signal bulbs can be replaced via a folding
cover in the wheel arch.
Halogen headlamps
At a glance
1 High beam cover

2 Low beam cover
3 Turn signal bulb socket
To remove the covers: 1 High beams/headlamp flasher

▷ High beams: fold out the bracket, arrow 4, 2 Parking lamps
and take the cover out of the guide. 3 Low beams
▷ Low beams: unscrew the cover, arrow 5. 4 Turn signal
Attach the covers carefully
When attaching the covers, proceed Low beams and high beams
carefully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing Wear protective goggles and gloves
damage to the headlamp system.◀
Halogen bulbs are pressurized. There‐
Proceed in reverse order when attaching the fore, wear protective goggles and gloves. Oth‐
covers. erwise, there is a danger of injuries if the bulb
is accidentally damaged during replacement.◀
Access via the wheel arch
The low beams and high beams have separate
For low beams and turn signals only: covers.
1. Turn the wheel inward.
2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch.
To open the locks, turn them counter‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
249
H7 bulb, 55 watt 3. Pull out the bulb socket, see arrow.
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock.
2. Low beam: open the folding cover in the
wheel arch, refer to page 249.
3. Remove the corresponding cover, refer to
page 249.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Slide the wire bracket sideways out of the
anchor, arrow 1, and fold down, arrow 2. 4. Pull off the bulb and replace it.
5. Insert the bulb socket.
6. Reattach the cover.
Xenon headlamps
Xenon headlamps
At a glance
6. Remove the bulb.

7. Insert the new bulb.
8. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it.
9. Mount the connector.
11. Low beam: attach the folding cover in the
wheel arch.
1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights
Parking and roadside parking lamps
2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher
5-watt bulb, W5W
3 Turn signal
control out of the ignition lock. Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to
lamps on and off frequently shortens their life.
page 249.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
on xenon headlamps
Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center.
Due to the high voltage present in the system,
there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is
carried out improperly.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
250
Adhere to the general instructions, refer to Turn signals, front

page 248. 21-watt bulb, PY21W
With Xenon headlamps, the following lamps
are designed with LED technology:
▷ Parking and roadside parking lamps.
2. Open the folding cover in the wheel arch,
▷ Daytime running lights. refer to page 249.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Parking lamps and roadside parking

lamps, daytime running lights
H8 bulb, 35 watt

2. Remove the high beam cover, refer to
page 249. 3. Turn the turn signal bulb socket 1 to the
left and remove it.
3. Turn the bulb by approx. 90˚, see arrow,
and pull it out. 4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and re‐
placement.
5. Insert the turn signal bulb socket 1 and
turn it all the way to the right.
6. Attach the folding cover in the wheel arch.
Turn signal in exterior mirror

Follow the general instructions on lamps and
bulbs, refer to page 248.
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and Contact your service center in the event of a
reconnect the plug. malfunction.
5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
Tail lamps
The tail lamps consist of two parts. One part is
in the tailgate and the other is in the fender.
P21W bulbs, 21 watt
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
251
On the right side, take the button with the

fuel pump symbol out of the holder toward
the front if necessary.
1 Backup lamp
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp LED
3 Brake lamp
4 Turn signal 4. Squeeze the lower clips, arrows 2, and take
out the bulb holder.
5 Inner brake lamp
5. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
If bulb 2 is defective, please contact the serv‐ turning it to the left for removal and re‐
ice center. placement.
6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audi‐
Lamps in fender bly clicks into place.
All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder. 7. Replace the cover.
control out of the ignition lock. Inside brake lamps in the tailgate
2. Press the cover out of the rear cargo area 1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
side trim and remove it. control out of the ignition lock.
2. Take the warning triangle out of the
bracket, refer to page 256.
3. Release the screws of the tailgate panel,
arrows.
3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing

down the upper clip, arrow 1.
4. Unclip the tailgate panel by pulling it down‐

ward.
5. Push out the handle for opening manually
in the event of an electrical malfunction, re‐
fer to page 36, insert it through the open‐
ing, and take off the panel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
252
6. Release the bulb holder with the clip, see Jacking points for the vehicle jack
arrows, and remove it.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐

7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while cated in the positions shown.
turning it to the left for removal and re‐
placement.
8. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audi‐ Vehicle battery
bly clicks into place.
9. Insert the handle for opening manually Maintenance
through the tailgate panel opening and The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐
press it in. trolyte will last for the life of the battery.
10. Reattach the tailgate panel. Your service center will be glad to advise you
on questions regarding the battery.
License plate lamp, center brake lamp,
and roadside parking lamp/tail lamp Battery replacement
These lamps are made using LED technology.
Use approved vehicle batteries
Contact your service center in the event of a
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
malfunction.
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
Changing wheels ble.◀
Notes After a battery replacement, have the battery

Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, re‐ registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐
fer to page 239, as standard equipment. ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
They do not need to be replaced immediately
in the event of a puncture. Charging the battery
No spare tire is available in the case of a flat
tire. Note
When mounting new tires or changing from Do not connect the charger to the socket
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-
Do not connect the battery charger to
flat tires for your own safety.
the socket installed in the vehicle at the factory
Suitable tools for changing the wheels are as this could damage the battery.◀
available from the service center as an acces‐
sory.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
253
General information Maintain the battery in an upright position for

Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged transport and storage. Secure the battery so
to achieve the full battery life. that it does not tip over during transport.
It may be necessary to charge the battery in

the following cases:
Fuses
▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to
drive short distances. Replacing fuses
▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
more than one month. do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
Starting aid terminals could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
Only charge using the starting aid terminals,
refer to page 257, in the engine compartment
while the engine is switched off.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be reinitialized.
Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again, refer to page 48.
Access to fuse box:
▷ Time: update, refer to page 75.
▷ Date: update, refer to page 76. 1. Open the glove compartment.
▷ Radio station: save again, refer to 2. Release the damper from the bottom
page 166. holder by applying pressure toward the
▷ Navigation system: wait for the navigation front, arrow 1.
system to be operational. 3. Unlock the glove compartment by pressing
▷ Panoramic glass sunroof: it may only be on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold down.
possible to tilt the roof. Have the system A pair of plastic tweezers is found on the cur‐
initialized by the service center. rent distributor.
▷ Digital compass: recalibrate, refer to Information on the fuses can be found on the
page 115. back of the cover.
▷ xDrive: the system automatically initializes Spare fuses are available from the service cen‐
as you drive. During this time, indicator ter.
lamps light up. If the lamps do not disap‐
pear during the current trip, have the sys‐
tem checked.
Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by your
service center or bring them to a recy‐
cling center.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
254
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle equipment ▷ The Assist system is operable.
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle is
activated.
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also ▷ ConnectedDrive subscription is available.
describes equipment that may not be found in Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Emergency Request not guaranteed
also applies to safety-related functions and For technical reasons, the Emergency
systems. Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
able conditions.◀
Initiating an Emergency Request
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
Hazard warning flashers
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the

The button for the hazard warning system is button lights up.
located on the center console. ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request
was initiated.
Do not fold in the exterior mirrors
If the circumstances allow this, remain in
While driving and when using the turn the vehicle until the connection has been
signal/hazard warning flashers, do not fold in established.
the exterior mirrors; otherwise, the additional
▷ The LED flashes if the connection to the
turn signal lamps in the exterior mirrors will not
BMW Assist Response Center has been
be in the appropriate position and will be diffi‐
established.
cult to detect.◀
Once the BMW Response Center has re‐
ceived your Emergency Request, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes
Intelligent Emergency further steps to help you.
Request Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
Requirements
steps to help you under certain circum‐
▷ Radio readiness is switched on. stances.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
255
Mobility Breakdown assistance
For this purpose, data that are used to de‐ First aid kit
termine the necessary rescue measures,
such as the current position of the vehicle
if it can be established, are transmitted to
the BMW Response Center.
▷ If the LED is flashing but the BMW Re‐
sponse Center cannot be heard on the
hands-free system, the hands-free system
may be malfunctioning. However, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
The first aid kit is located in a storage compart‐
Initiating an Emergency Request ment on the right side in the cargo area.
automatically
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ pouch have a limited service life.
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
Check the expiration dates of the contents
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
regularly and replace any items promptly.
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Jump-starting
Warning triangle Notes
If the battery is discharged, an engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
Do not touch live parts
On the inside of the tailgate. To remove, press To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
on the tab, arrow. jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐
mately the same capacitance in Ah. This
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
256
Bodywork contact between vehicles aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
There must not be any contact between tance.
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there 3. Attach the other end of the cable to the
is a danger of shorting.◀ positive terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding starting aid terminal of the
Starting aid terminals vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
Connecting order
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
Connect the jumper cables in the correct the battery, or to the corresponding engine
order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury or body ground of the vehicle providing as‐
from sparking.◀ sistance.
5. Attach the other end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ creased idle speed.
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐
2. Start the engine of the vehicle being
tive terminal. Pull the cover up and off.
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the

negative terminal.
Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
Connecting jumper cables
Observe applicable laws and regulations
1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐
for tow-starting and towing.◀
minal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive No additional passengers
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the Do not transport any passengers other
battery, or to the corresponding starting than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
257
Automatic transmission, 8-gear: Automatic transmission, 6-gear

transporting your vehicle Selector lever in position N.
Note Adhere to the towing speed and distance
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Do not exceed a towing speed of

Therefore, contact a service center in the 40 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of
event of a breakdown. 90 miles/150 km or damage to the transmis‐
sion can occur.◀
Do not have the vehicle towed
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ Being towed
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐
cur.◀ Follow the towing instructions
Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle
Tow truck damage or accidents may occur.◀
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;

otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn
signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐
available.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
Do not lift the vehicle steering.
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or ▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage quired.
may result.◀ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
pending on local regulations.
Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for
maneuvering the vehicle only. ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
Towing your vehicle a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Observe before towing your vehicle
Tow truck
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter sDrive
than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to Vehicles with automatic transmission, 6-gear.
control vehicle response.◀
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly

Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
cause damage.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
258
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly

identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
may result.◀
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
xDrive Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is attached offset.
Towing a vehicle with xDrive
Tow rope
Do not tow a vehicle with xDrive with just
the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
wheels could lock up and the transfer case that the tow rope is taut.
could be damaged.◀ To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
Towing other vehicles ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attaching the tow rope correctly
General information
Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐
Light towing vehicle ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is
Your vehicle must not be lighter than the secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀
vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be
possible to control vehicle response.◀ Tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly
ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow front or rear of the BMW.
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
It is located in the tool kit under the cargo floor
cause damage.◀
cover and storage compartment in the cargo
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ area, refer to page 247.
pending on local regulations. It is stored with the tool kit under the cargo
floor cover in the cargo area, refer to page 247.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
259
Tow fitting, information on use

▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀
Screw thread
Press on the lower part of the cover. The cover

is pushed out at the top edge and can be
pulled out.
Tow-starting
Note
Do not tow-start your vehicle.
Due to the automatic transmission, the engine
cannot be started by tow-starting.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐
edied.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
260
Care Mobility
Care
Vehicle equipment Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as
leaves, from the area below the windshield
This chapter describes all series equipment as when the hood is open.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter.
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
special equipment or the country version. This vehicle.
systems. Washing in automatic car washes
When using the features and systems descri‐ Give preference to cloth car washes or those
bed here, adhere to local regulations. that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint
damage.
Car washes Notes

Note the following:
Notes ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
Steam jets or high-pressure washers damaged by the transport mechanisms.
When using steam jets or high-pressure ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away may be damaged, depending on the width
and use a maximum temperature of of the vehicle.
140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
Holding them too close or using excessively page 63, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
high pressures or temperatures can cause vation.
damage or preliminary damage that may then ▷ Move the rear window wiper to its resting
lead to long-term damage. position, deactivate it, and protect it
Follow the operating instructions for the high- against damage. Ask the car wash operator
pressure washer.◀ about any necessary protective measures.
▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐
Do not direct steam or high-pressure washers
stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if
toward the decorative labels applied by the
there is a risk that these may be damaged.
manufacturer; otherwise, damage may result.
Guide rails in car washes
Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-
pressure washers Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
When using high-pressure washers, do not
could be damaged.◀
spray the exterior sensors and cameras, for
Park Distance Control or the backup camera,
for instance, for extended periods of time and Before driving into a car wash
only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀ The vehicle is able to roll if the following steps
are taken.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
261
Mobility Care
Automatic transmission Car care and cleaning products

1. Release the parking brake, refer to Follow the instructions on the container.
page 61. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
2. Drive into the car wash. windows.
3. Depress the brake pedal if necessary. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
4. Engage the selector lever or transmission cles.
position N. Cleansers can contain substances that are
5. Switch the engine off. dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition

lock so that the vehicle can roll. Vehicle paint
In 8-gear automatic transmissions, transmis‐ Regular care contributes to driving safety and
sion position P is engaged automatically: value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with high air pollution or natural contami‐
▷ Automatically after approx. 30 minutes.
nants, such as tree resin or pollen, can have an
▷ When the remote control is removed from impact on the vehicle paint. Tailor the fre‐
the ignition lock. quency and extent of your car care to these in‐
fluences.
Headlights Immediately remove aggressive substances,
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird drop‐
caustic cleansers. pings, to prevent damage to or discoloration of
▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due the paintwork.
to insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water. Leather care
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an Remove dust from the leather often, using a
ice scraper. cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
After washing the vehicle chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes wear and premature degradation of the leather
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action surface.
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake To guard against discoloration, such as from
discs can occur. clothing, provide leather care roughly every
Fully remove any residue from the windows to two months.
prevent obstruction of view from streaking, Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
wiping noises, and wiper wear. dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
Vehicle care layer of the leather surface.
Suitable care products are available from the
Car care products
service center.
BMW recommends using cleaning and care
products from BMW, since these have been Upholstery material care
tested and approved.
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
262
Care Mobility
If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use Plastic components
a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐ These include:
ble interior cleaner.
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
▷ Headliner.
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously. ▷ Lamp lenses.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or ▷ Matte black spray-coated components.

other articles of clothing can damage the seat ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are Clean with a microfiber cloth.
closed.◀
Moisten the cloth lightly with water if neces‐
sary.
Caring for special components Do not soak the headliner.
Light-alloy wheels Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol

When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only or solvents
use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
of 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaners or a solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
steam jet hotter than 140 ℉/60 ℃; otherwise, grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
damage may result. Adhere to the manufac‐ to surface damage.◀
turer instructions.
Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may Safety belts
destroy the protective coating of neighboring Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
components such as the brake disc. thus have a negative impact on safety.
No chemical cleaning
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply the webbing.◀
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
ularly when they have been exposed to road belts clipped into their buckles.
salt.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber Carpets and floor mats
cleansers.
No objects in the area around the pedals
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
silicon-containing car care products in order to Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
avoid damage or reduced noise damping. objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;
otherwise, the function of the pedals could be
impeded while driving
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ Do not place additional floor mats over existing
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a mats or other objects.
soft cloth.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
263
Mobility Care
Only use floor mats that have been approved

for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in
place.
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐
tened again when they are returned after being
removed, such as for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐

ger compartment for cleaning.
When returning the floor mats, secure them
again to prevent slipping.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensors/cameras
To clean sensors or cameras, use a cloth mois‐
tened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Displays/screens
Clean the displays with an anti-static micro‐
fiber cloth.
Cleaning displays
Do not use chemical or household
cleansers.
Keep all fluids and moisture away from the
unit.
Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐
ces or electrical components.
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do
not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage
can result.◀
Long-term vehicle storage

Your service center can advise you on what to
consider when storing the vehicle for longer
than three months.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
264
Care Mobility
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
265
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice activation system, and
an index that will quickly take you to the
information you need.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Reference Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle equipment Note
This chapter describes all series equipment as The technical data and specifications in the
well as country-specific and special equipment Owner's Manual serve as guidelines. Detailed
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also values can be obtained from your registration
describes equipment that may not be found in documents, from labels in your vehicle, or from
your vehicle, for instance due to the selected the service center.
systems.
Dimensions
BMW X1
Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.8/1,798
Width with mirrors inches/mm 81.0/2,058
Height inches/mm 60.8/1,545
Length inches/mm 176.5/4,484
Wheelbase inches/mm 108.7/2,760
Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 37.1/11.3
Smallest turning circle dia. with all-wheel ft/m 38.7/11.8

drive
Weights
BMW X1 X1 sDrive28i X1 xDrive28i X1 xDrive35i
Approved gross vehicle lbs/kg 4,497/2,040 4,707/2,135 4,861/2,205

weight
Load lbs/kg 904/410 904/410 904/410
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,116/960 2,326/1,055 2,425/1,100
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
268
Technical data Reference
BMW X1 X1 sDrive28i X1 xDrive28i X1 xDrive35i
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,546/1,155 2,590/1,175 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load ca‐ lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75

pacity
Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 25.0-56.0/420‐ 25.0-56.0/420‐ 25.0-56.0/420-

1,350 1,350 1,350
Capacities
BMW X1 Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters Approx. 16.6/63 Fuel specifications, refer to

page 228
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
269
Reference Short commands for voice activation system
Short commands for voice activation

system
Vehicle equipment General information
This chapter describes all series equipment as Instructions for voice activation system, refer
well as country-specific and special equipment to page 25.
offered for this model series. Therefore, it also To have the available spoken instructions read
describes equipment that may not be found in out loud: ›Voice commands‹
The following short commands apply to vehi‐
cles equipped with a voice activation system.
They have no function in vehicles in which only
systems.
the mobile phone is operated using the voice.
Adjusting
Vehicle
Function Command
Opens the main menu. ›Main menu‹
Open the options. ›Options‹
Open the settings. ›Settings‹
Settings on the Control Display. ›Control display‹
Open the time and date. ›Time and date‹
Open the language and units. ›Language and units‹
Open the speed limit. ›Speed‹
Open the light. ›Lighting‹
Open the door lock. ›Door locks‹
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
270
Short commands for voice activation system Reference
Vehicle information
Computer
Function Command
Open the computer. ›Onboard info‹
Open the trip computer. ›Trip computer‹
Vehicle
Function Command
Open the vehicle information. ›Vehicle info‹
Open the vehicle status. ›Vehicle status‹
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Navigation menu. ›Navigation‹
Open the destination entry. ›Enter address‹
Enter the address. ›Enter address‹
Enter the town/city. ›City‹
Enter the country. ›State‹
Enter the postal code. ›Postal Code‹
Open destination guidance. ›Guidance‹
Start destination guidance. ›Start guidance‹
Terminate destination guidance. ›Stop guidance‹
Open the home address. ›Home address‹
Open the route criteria. ›Route preference‹
Open the route. ›Route information‹
Switch on the spoken instruction. ›Switch on voice instructions‹
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
271
Function Command
Repeat the spoken instruction. ›Repeat voice instructions‹
Switch off the spoken instruction. ›Switch off voice instructions‹
Display the address book. ›Address book‹
Display the most recent destinations. ›Last destinations‹
Open the traffic bulletins. ›Traffic Info‹
Special destinations. ›Points of interest‹
Map
Function Command
Display the map. ›Map‹
Map facing north. ›Map facing north‹
Map facing the direction of travel. ›Map in direction of travel‹
Perspective map. ›Map perspective view‹
Automatic scaling of the map. ›Map with automatic scaling‹
Scale...feet. ›Map scale ... feet‹
Scale...meters. ›Map scale ... meters‹ e.g., map scale

100 meters
Scale...kilometers. ›Map scale ... kilometers‹ e.g., map

scale 5 kilometers
Scale...miles. ›Map scale ... miles‹ e.g., map scale

5 miles
Split screen settings
Function Command
Split screen. ›Switch on splitscreen‹
Switch off the split screen. ›Turn off split screen‹
Adjust the split screen. ›Split screen content‹
Split screen, map facing north. ›Split screen map facing north‹
Split screen, current position. ›Split screen current position‹
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
272
Function Command
Split screen, facing the direction of travel. ›Split screen map in direction of
travel‹
Split screen, perspective. ›Split screen perspective‹
Split screen, expanded intersection zoom. ›Splitscreen Exit ramp view‹
Split screen scale...feet. ›Split screen scale ... feet‹ e.g., split
screen scale 100 feet
Split screen scale...meters. ›Split screen scale ... meters‹ e.g.,

split screen scale 100 meters
Split screen scale...kilometers. ›Split screen scale ... kilometers‹ e.g.,

split screen scale 5 kilometers
Split screen scale...miles. ›Split screen scale ... miles‹ e.g., split
screen scale 5 miles
Split screen, highlight the traffic situation. ›Split screen, Traffic conditions‹
Split screen, computer. ›Split screen on board info‹
Split screen, trip computer. ›Splitscreen trip computer‹
Split screen, scale automatically. ›Split screen automatic scaling‹
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function Command
Enter a new destination. ›Enter address‹
Trip list. ›Stored trips‹
Radio
FM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... megahertz‹ e.g.,

93.5 megahertz or frequency 93.5
Open the radio. ›Radio‹
Open the FM stations. ›F M‹
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
273
Function Command
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Select a frequency range. ›Select frequency‹
Open a station. ›Select station‹
AM
Function Command
Open a frequency. ›Frequency ... Kilohertz‹ e.g., fre‐

quency 753 or 753 kilohertz
Open the AM stations. ›A M‹
Open the manual search. ›Manual‹
Satellite radio
Function Command
Open the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio‹
Switch on the satellite radio. ›Satellite radio on‹
Select a satellite radio channel. ›Select satellite radio‹ e.g., satellite

radio channel 2
Stored stations
Function Command
Open the stored stations. ›Presets‹
Choose a stored station. ›Select preset‹
Select a stored station. ›Preset ...‹ e.g., stored station 2
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
274
CD/multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function Command
Select a track. ›Track ...‹ e.g., track 5

or
›C D track ...‹ e. g., CD track 5
Play back a CD. ›C D on‹
Select a CD. ›Select C D‹
Select a CD and track. ›C D ... track ...‹ e.g., CD 3 track 5
Open the CD and Multimedia menu. ›C D and multimedia‹
CD and DVD. ›C D‹
Select a DVD. ›D V D ...‹ e.g., DVD 3
Display the entertainment details on a split screen. ›Entertainment details‹
Music collection
Function Command
Search for music, open a menu. ›Music search‹
Open the current playback. ›Current playback‹
Open the music collection. ›Music collection‹
Play back the music collection. ›Music collection on‹
Play back the most frequently played tracks. ›Top fifty‹
External devices
Function Command
Open the external devices. ›External devices‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
275
Tone
Function Command
Open the tone settings. ›Tone‹
Telephone
Function Command
Dial a phone number. ›Dial number‹
Open the Telephone menu. ›Telephone‹
Display the phone book. ›Phonebook‹
Redialing. ›Redial‹
Display received calls. ›Received calls‹
List of messages. ›Messages‹
Open the Bluetooth devices. ›Bluetooth‹
Office
Function Command
Open the Office menu. ›Office‹
Display Office Today. ›Current office‹
Display the contacts. ›Contacts‹
Display the messages. ›Messages‹
Display the calendar. ›Calendar‹
Display the tasks. ›Tasks‹
Display the reminders. ›Reminders‹
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
276
Contacts
Function Command
Select a name. ›Choose name‹
My contacts. ›My contacts‹
Open the contacts. ›Contacts‹
New contact. ›New contact‹
ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist
Function Command
Open BMW Assist. ›B M W Assist‹
Open ConnectedDrive. ›Connected Drive‹
Open BMW Online. ›B M W Online‹
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
277
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Air vents Assistance with driving off,
– Refer to Ventilation 111 refer to Drive-off assis‐
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ Alarm system 39 tant 100
tem 97 Alarm system Assistance with starting en‐
Accident, refer to Emergency – Avoiding unintentional gine, refer to Jump-start‐
Request, initiating 255 alarms 40 ing 256
– Ending an alarm 39
Acoustic signal, refer to Audio device, external 124
– Interior motion sensor 40
Check Control 80 Audio playback 175
– Tilt alarm sensor 40
Activated charcoal filter with Audio playback, Blue‐
All around the headliner 17
automatic climate con‐ tooth 187
ALL program 110
trol 111 Automatic
All-season tires, refer to Win‐
Adaptive brake lights, refer to – Air distribution 109
ter tires 238
Brake force display 96 – Air flow rate 109
All-wheel drive, refer to Automatic car wash 261
Adaptive Light Control 84
xDrive 99 Automatic climate con‐
Additional telephone 196
Alternating-code hand-held trol 108
Additives, coolant 244
transmitter 114 Automatic climate control
Additives, engine oil 243
AM/FM station 166 – Automatic air distribu‐
After washing vehicle 262
Announcement, navigation, tion 109
Airbags 88
refer to Spoken instruc‐ Automatic, cruise control 101
Airbags, indicator/warning
tions 155 Automatic Curb Monitor 49
light 91
Antifreeze, coolant 244 Automatic Engine Start/Stop
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐
Antifreeze, washer fluid 65 Function 59
culated air mode 110
Antilock Brake System, Automatic headlamp con‐
Air conditioning mode
ABS 97 trol 83, 84
– Automatic climate con‐
Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐ Automatic recirculated air
trol 108
– Ventilation 111 namic Stability Control control 110
Air distribution DSC 97 Automatic transmission with
– Automatic 109 Anti-theft protection 32 Steptronic 65, 68
– Manual 109 Appointments 212 Automatic transmission with
Air drying, refer to Cooling Approved axle loads, refer to Steptronic
function 110 Weights 268 – Interlock 65
Air flow rate 110 Approved engine oils 243 – Kickdown 66, 68
Airing, refer to Ventila‐ Approved gross vehicle – Overriding selector lever
tion 111 weight, refer to lock 67
Air pressure, refer to Tire in‐ Weights 268 AUTO program with auto‐
flation pressure 230 Armrest, refer to Center arm‐ matic climate control 109
Air supply rest 124 AUX-IN port 124, 184
– Automatic climate con‐ Arrival time, refer to Com‐ Average fuel consumption 73
trol 108 puter 74 Average fuel consumption
– Ventilation 111 – Setting the units 75
Ashtray 117
Average speed 73
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
278
Everything from A to Z Reference
Average speed, refer to Com‐ Bluetooth connection, acti‐ C

puter 73 vating/deactivating 197
Axle loads, refer to BMW Apps 222 Calendar 212
Weights 268 BMW EfficientDynamics, re‐ California Proposition 65
fer to Saving fuel 137 Warning 7
B BMW Homepage 6 Camera, care 264
BMW Internet page 6 Camera, refer to Backup cam‐
Backrest curvature, refer to BMW maintenance sys‐ era 105
Lumbar support 45 tem 245 Can holder, refer to Cu‐
Backrests, refer to Seats 44 BMW Online 220 pholder 125
Backrest width adjust‐ Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ Car battery, refer to Vehicle
ment 46 pholder 125 battery 253
Back seats Brake assistant 97 Car care products 262
– Adjusting the backrest Brake discs, breaking in 130 Care 261
tilt 119 Brake fluid, refer to Service Care, displays 264
Backup camera 105 requirements 78 Care, vehicle 262
Backup camera, obstacle Brake force display 96 Cargo 134
marking 107 Brake force distribution, elec‐ Cargo area 118
Backup camera, pathway tronic 97 Cargo area
lines 106 Brake lamps – Comfort Access 37
Backup camera, turning – Bulb replacement 252 – Cover 118
lines 106 Brake lamps, brake force dis‐ – Folding up the cargo floor
Backup lamps, bulb replace‐ play 96 panel 121
ment 252 Brake lights, adaptive 96 – Multi-function hook 122
Balance 164 Brake pads, breaking in 130 – Partition net 119
Band-aids, refer to First aid Brakes Cargo area, capacities 268
kit 256 – Parking brake 61 Cargo area, enlarging 119
Bass 164 Brakes, BMW maintenance Cargo area lid, refer to Tail‐
Battery system 245 gate 35
– Remote control 30 Brakes, service require‐ Cargo area light, refer to Inte‐
Battery disposal 254 ments 78 rior lights 87
Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐ Brake system, BMW mainte‐ Cargo area net, refer to Parti‐
tery 253 nance system 245 tion net 119
Battery replacement, remote Braking, notes 131 Cargo area, opening from the
control for vehicle 38 Breakdown assistance, refer inside 36
Before entering the car to Roadside Assistance 219 Cargo area, opening from the
wash 261 Breakdown, transporting the outside 36
Belts, refer to Safety belts 46 vehicle 258 Cargo floor panel
Belt tensioners, refer to Breaking in 130 – Folding up 121
Safety belts 46 Brightness on the Control Cargo floor panel, raising 121
Beverage holder, refer to Cu‐ Display 78 Cargo straps, securing
pholder 125 Bulb replacement, refer to cargo 135
Black and white map dis‐ Lamp and bulb replace‐ Car key, refer to Integrated
play 158 ment 248 key/remote control 30
Blower, refer to Air flow Button for starting the engine, Carpet, care 263
rate 110 refer to Start/Stop but‐
Bluetooth audio 187 ton 57
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
279
Car phone, installation loca‐ Child restraint fixing systems, Compartments, refer to Stor‐
tion, refer to Center arm‐ mounting 52 age compart‐
rest 124 Child safety locks 55 ments 123, 125
Car phone, refer to Tele‐ Child seat, mounting 52 Compass, digital 115
phone 196 Child seats, refer to Trans‐ Computer 73
Car vacuum cleaner, connect‐ porting children safely 52 Computer, displaying infor‐
ing, refer to Connecting Chrome parts, care 263 mation 73
electrical devices 117 Cigarette lighter, connecting Computer, displays on the
Car wash 261 electrical devices 117 Control Display 74
Catalytic converter, refer to Cigarette lighter, refer to Concierge service 219
Hot exhaust system 131 Lighter 117 Condensation under the vehi‐
CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Cigarette lighter socket 117 cle 132
ice 245 Circulation of air, refer to Re‐ Condition Based Service
CD/DVD 174 circulated air mode 110 CBS 245
CD/DVD notes 178 Cleaning, displays 264 Confirmation signals for lock‐
CDs, storing 179 Cleaning your BMW, refer to ing/unlocking the vehicle 33
Cell phone 196 Care 261 Connecting, mobile phone,
Cell phone, installation loca‐ Clock 71 refer to Pairing the mobile
tion, refer to Center arm‐ Clock phone 197
rest 124 – 12h/24h format 76 Consumption, refer to Aver‐
Center armrest, front 124 – Setting the time and date 76 age fuel consumption 73
Center armrest, rear 124 Closing Contacts 208, 216
Center brake lamp, bulb re‐ – From the inside 35 Control Display 18
– From the outside 32
placement 253 Control Display, care 264
Clothes hooks 125
Center console, refer to Control Display, settings 77
Cockpit 12
Around the center con‐ Controller 19
Cold start, refer to Starting
sole 16 Controls and displays 12
the engine 58
Central locking Control systems, driving sta‐
– Comfort Access 37 Combination instrument, refer
bility 97
– From the inside 35 to Instrument cluster 14
Convenient operation
– Setting the unlocking char‐ Combination switch, refer to – Glass sunroof 32
acteristics 32 Turn signal/high beams/ – Window 32
Central locking system headlamp flasher 62 Coolant 244
– From the outside 31 Combination switch, refer to Coolant, checking the
– Principle 31 Washer/wiper system 62 level 244
Central screen, refer to Con‐ Comfort Access 37 Coolant temperature 72
trol Display 18 Comfort Access Cooling function, switching
Changes, technical, refer to – Battery replacement 38 on and off 110
Safety 6 Comfort area, refer to Around Cooling, maximum 109
Changing wheels/tires 237 the center console 16 Cooling system, refer to Cool‐
Check Control 80 Compact wheel, inflation ant 244
Children, transporting 52 pressure 230 Corrosion on brake discs 132
Child restraint fixing system Compartment for remote Courtesy lights, refer to Inte‐
LATCH 53 control, refer to Ignition rior lights 87
Child restraint fixing sys‐ lock 57 Cradle for telephone or mo‐
tems 52 Compartment in floor 121 bile phone, refer to Snap-in
adapter 205
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
280
Cruise control 101 Disposal, vehicle battery 254 Dynamic Traction Control
Cruise control Distance warning, refer to DTC 98
– Malfunction 103 Park Distance Control
Cupholder 125 PDC 103 E
Curb weight, refer to Divided rear seat backrest, re‐
Weights 268 fer to Enlarging the cargo ECO PRO 138
Current fuel consumption 72 area 119 ECO PRO display 138
Current location, storing 146 Divided screen view, split ECO PRO driving mode 138
Curve lights, refer to Adaptive screen 22 ECO PRO mode 138
Light Control 84 Door key, refer to Remote EfficientDynamics, refer to
control with integrated Saving fuel 137
D key 30 Electrical malfunction
Door lock 34 – Door lock 35
Dashboard lighting, refer to Doors, manual operation 35 – Driver's door 35
Instrument lighting 87 Doors, unlocking and locking – Fuel filler flap 227
Dashboard, refer to Cock‐ – Confirmation signals 33 – Tailgate 36
pit 12 – From the inside 35 Electric seat adjustment 45
Data, technical 268 – From the outside 32 Electronic brake-force distri‐
Date DOT Quality Grades 236 bution 97
– Date format 77 Downhill control 99 Electronic engine oil level
– Setting 76 Draft-free ventilation 111 check 241
Daytime running lights 84 Drive-off assistant 100 Electronic Stability Program
Daytime running lights, bulb Driving away on inclines, refer ESP, refer to Dynamic Sta‐
replacement 251 to Drive-off assistant 100 bility Control DSC 97
Defroster Driving notes, breaking Emergency activation
– Rear window 111 in 130 – Automatic transmission, re‐
Destination entry via the ad‐ Driving notes, general 130 fer to Overriding selector
dress book 146 Driving on poor roads 132 lever lock 67
Destination guidance 153 Emergency operation
Driving stability control sys‐
Destination guidance with in‐ – Door lock, refer to Manual
tems 97
termediate destinations 151 operation 35
Driving through water 131
Destination input, naviga‐ Emergency operation, fuel
Driving tips, refer to Driving
tion 144 filler flap, unlocking man‐
notes 130
Digital clock 71 ually 227
Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐
Digital compass 115 Emergency Request 255
tion 110
Digital radio 167 Energy-conscious driving, re‐
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
Dimming mirrors 50 fer to Current fuel consump‐
trol 97
Directional indicators, refer to tion 72
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Energy, saving
Turn signals 62 trol 98 – Automatic Engine Start/
Display lighting, refer to In‐ DTMF suffix dialing 202 Stop Function 59
strument lighting 87 DVD/CD 174 Energy, saving, refer to Sav‐
Displays and controls 12 DVDs, storing 179 ing fuel 137
Displays, care 264 DVD, video 176 Engine, breaking in 130
Displays, cleaning 264 Dynamic destination guid‐ Engine compartment 240
Displays, refer to Instrument ance 160 Engine coolant, refer to Cool‐
cluster 14 Dynamic Stability Control ant 244
Disposal, coolant 244 DSC 97
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
281
Engine oil, adding 243 Exterior mirrors, folding in and Flat tire, warning light 94
Engine oil, additives, refer to out 50 Flat tire, wheel change 253
Approved engine oils 243 External audio device 124 Flooding, refer to Driving
Engine oil, alternative oil External devices 184 through water 131
types 243 External temperature dis‐ Floor carpet, care 263
Engine oil, BMW maintenance play 71 Floor mats, care 263
system 245 External temperature display FM/AM station 166
Engine oil change intervals, – Changing the unit of meas‐ Fog lamps 86
refer to Service require‐ ure 75 Fog lamps, indicator lamp 86
ments 78 – On computer 75 Foldable rear seat back‐
Engine oil, checking the External temperature warn‐ rest 119
level 241 ing 71 Folding sun visor 117
Engine oil, filling ca‐ Externel temperature dis‐ Foot brake 131
pacity 269 play 71 Footwell lights, refer to Inte‐
Engine oil temperature 72 Eyes for securing cargo 135 rior lights 87
Engine oil types, alterna‐ For your own safety 6
tive 243 F Four-wheel drive, refer to
Engine oil types, ap‐ xDrive 99
proved 243 Fader 164 Front airbags 88
Engine, overheating, refer to Failure messages, refer to Front fog lamps 86
Coolant temperature 72 Check Control 80 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 91
Engine start, assistance 256 False alarm Fuel 228
– Avoiding unintentional Fuel
Engine, starting 58
alarms 40 – Refer to Average fuel con‐
Engine, starting
– Ending an alarm 39 sumption 73
– Comfort Access 37
Fastening safety belts, refer Fuel, additives 228
Engine, starting, Start/Stop
to Safety belts 46 Fuel, average consump‐
button 57
Fault messages, refer to tion 73
Engine, stopping, Start/Stop
Check Control 80 Fuel cap 226
button 57
Filling capacities 269 Fuel cap, closing 226
Engine, switching off 59
Filter Fuel consumption display
Environmentally friendly driv‐
– Refer to Microfilter/acti‐ – Average fuel consump‐
ing, refer to Current fuel vated-charcoal filter with
consumption 72 tion 73
automatic climate con‐
Equalizer 164 Fuel consumption display,
trol 111
Equipment, interior 113 current fuel consump‐
Fine wood, care 263
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ tion 72
First aid kit 256
gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐ Fuel-efficient driving, refer to
Fitting for towing 259
bility Control DSC 97 Current fuel consump‐
Flashing when locking/
Exchanging wheels/tires 237 tion 72
unlocking 33
Exhaust system 131 Fuel filler flap 226
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 91
Exterior mirrors 49 Fuel filler flap, closing 226
Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow
Exterior mirrors, adjusting 49 Fuel filler flap, opening 226
chains 239
Exterior mirrors, automatic Fuel filler flap, unlocking in
Flat tire, run-flat tires 239
dimming 50 case of an electrical mal‐
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
Exterior mirrors, automatic function 227
tor TPM 93
heating 50 Fuel gauge 72
Flat tire, warning lamp 92
Fuel, saving 137
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
282
Fuel tank capacity, refer to Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ High-beams, indicator

Filling capacities 269 nating code 114 lamp 15
Fuel tank contents, refer to Hands-free microphone 16 High-pressure washers 261
Filling capacities 269 Hazard warning sys‐ Hill Descent Control HDC 99
Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐ tem 16, 255 Hill drive-off assistant, refer to
pacities 269 HDC Hill Descent Control 99 Drive-off assistant 100
Fuse 254 HD Radio 167 Hills 132
Head airbags 88 Holder for beverages 125
G Headlamp control, auto‐ Holder for remote control, re‐
matic 83, 84 fer to Ignition lock 57
Garage door opener, refer to Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐ Homepage 6
Universal garage door ture 84 Hood 241
opener 113 Headlamp cover, remov‐ Hood, opening 241
Gasoline 228 ing 249 Horn 12
Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel Headlamp flasher 62, 85 Hot exhaust system 131
gauge 72 Headlamps 83 Hotline 221
Gas station recommenda‐ Headlamps House number, entering for
tion 155 – Bulb replacement 249 navigation 145
Gear change Headlamps, care 262 Hydraulic brake assistant 97
– Automatic transmission with Headlamps, cleaning 64 Hydroplaning 131
Steptronic 66 Headlight flasher, indicator
Gear change, automatic lamp 15 I
transmission with Step‐ Headlights, cleaning, washer
tronic 69 fluid 65 Ice warning, refer to External
Gear change, via shift pad‐ Headliner 17 temperature warning 71
dles 69 Head restraints 47 Icy roads, refer to External
Gear display, automatic trans‐ Head restraints temperature warning 71
mission with Steptronic 65 – Adjusting the height 47 Identification marks, tires 235
General driving notes 130 – Removing 48 Identification number, refer to
Glare protection 117 Heating
Engine compartment 240
Glass sunroof, electric – Rear window 111
iDrive 18
– Convenient operation 32 – Seats 46
iDrive
– Remote control 32 Heating, mirrors 50
– Changing settings 77
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐ Heavy cargo, refer to Stowing
– Changing the date and
amic glass sunroof 41 cargo 135 time 76
Glove compartment 123 Height adjustment – Changing the language 77
Glove compartment, light‐ – Seats 44 – Changing the units of meas‐
ing 123 Height, refer to Dimen‐ ure and display format 75
GPS navigation, refer to Navi‐ sions 268 – Setting the brightness 78
gation system 142 High-beam Assistant 85 Ignition 58
Gross vehicle weight, refer to High beams 85 Ignition key position 1, refer
Weights 268 High beams to Radio ready state 57
– Bulb replacement 249 Ignition key position 2, refer
High beams/low beams, auto‐
H matic, refer to High-beam
to Ignition on 58
Ignition key, refer to Remote
Assistant 85 control with integrated
Halogen headlamps
– Bulb replacement 249 key 30
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
283
Ignition lock 57 Interior temperature, setting Lamps, High-beam Assis‐

Ignition, switched off 58 – Automatic climate con‐ tant 85
Ignition, switched on 58 trol 108 Lamps, parking lamps/low
Indication of a flat tire 92, 94 Interlock, refer to Disengag‐ beams 83
Indicator and warning ing the remote control 65 Lamps, replacing, refer to
lights 15 Intermediate destina‐ Lamp and bulb replace‐
Inflation pressure monitor, re‐ tions 151 ment 248
fer to Flat Tire Monitor 91 Internet page 6 Language, changing on the
Inflation pressure, refer to Intersection, entering for navi‐ Control Display 77
Tire inflation pressure 230 gation 145 Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
Information on the navigation iPod/iPhone 185 to Safety belts 46
data 142 Lashing eyes, securing
Initialization after power fail‐ J cargo 135
ure 254 LATCH child restraint fixing
Initializing Jacking points for the vehicle system 53
– Compass, refer to Calibrat‐ jack 253 Leather, care 262
ing 116 Jack, refer to Vehicle LEDs, light-emitting di‐
– Panoramic glass sunroof 43 jack 253 odes 248
– Refer to Setting the time Joystick, refer to Selector Length, refer to Dimen‐
and date 76 lever 68 sions 268
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor Jump-starting 256 Letters and numbers, enter‐
FTM 91
ing 23
Initializing, Tire Pressure K License plate lamp, bulb re‐
Monitor TPM 94
placement 253
Inside brake lamps Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Light-alloy wheels, care 263
– Bulb replacement 252 Access 37 Light-emitting diodes,
Installation location, tele‐ Keyless opening and closing, LEDs 248
phone 124 refer to Comfort Access 37 Lighter 117
Instrument cluster 14 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ Lighting
Instrument lighting 87 sonal Profile 30 – Instruments 87
Instrument panel, refer to In‐ Key, refer to Integrated key/ – Lamp and bulb replace‐
strument cluster 14 remote control 30 ment 248
Instruments, refer to Cock‐ Kickdown Lighting, vehicle, refer to
pit 12 – Automatic transmission with Lamps 83
Integrated key 30 Steptronic 66, 68 Light switch 83
Interactive map 149 Knee airbag 88 Limit, refer to Speed limit 81
Interior equipment 113 Knocking control 228 Load 135
Interior lamps Loading 134
– Remote control 33
L Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Interior lights 87
Locking 35
Interior mirror 50 Label, run-flat tire 239 Locking
Interior motion sensor 40 Lamp and bulb replacement, – From the inside 35
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ lamp replacement 248 – From the outside 32
matic dimming 50 Lamps 83 – Setting the confirmation
Interior rearview mirror, com‐ Lamps, automatic headlamp signals 33
pass 115 control 83, 84 – Without remote control, re‐
fer to Comfort Access 37
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
284
Locking the vehicle Manual mode, automatic Mobile communication devi‐

– From the inside 35 transmission with Step‐ ces in the vehicle 131
– From the outside 32 tronic 66, 69 Mobile phone, installation lo‐
Locks, doors, and win‐ Manual operation cation, refer to Center arm‐
dows 55 – Door lock 35 rest 124
Longlife oils, alternative oil – Driver's door 35 Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐
types 243 – Selector lever lock, auto‐ phone 196
Longlife oils, refer to Ap‐ matic transmission 67 Modifications, technical, refer
proved engine oils 243 Manual operation, fuel filler to Safety 6
Low beams 83 flap 227 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐
Low beams Map, destination entry 149 play 18
– Automatic 84 Map display in black and Mounting of child restraint fix‐
– Bulb replacement 249 white 158 ing systems 52
Low beams, automatic 83 Map in split screen 157 MP3 player 184
Low beams, automatic, refer Map view 155 Multimedia 174
to High-beam Assistant 85 Marking on approved Music collection 179
Lower back support, refer to tires 238 Music search 181
Lumbar support 45 Master key, refer to Remote Music, storing 179
Luggage rack control with integrated
– Rear luggage rack 136 key 30
Luggage rack, refer to Roof- Maximum cooling 109
N
mounted luggage rack 136 Maximum speed, winter Navigation 142
Lumbar support 45 tires 238 Navigation data 142
Medical kit, refer to First aid Navigation data, updat‐
M kit 256 ing 142
Memory, refer to Seat and Navigation system
Main inspection, refer to mirror memory 48 – Destination entry by
Service requirements 78 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 voice 150
Maintenance 245 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ Neck restraints, refer to Head
Maintenance, refer to Service ing concept 19 restraints 47
booklet Message list, traffic bulle‐ Nets, refer to Storage com‐
Maintenance, refer to Service tins 157 partments 125
requirements 78 Messages 210 Neutral cleaner, care 263
Maintenance require‐ Microfilter New wheels and tires 237
ments 245 – With automatic climate con‐ Notes 6, 213
Maintenance system trol 111 Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐
BMW 245 Minimum tread, tires 237 tion 111
Makeup mirror 117 Mirror
Malfunction – Mirror memory, refer to Seat
– Automatic transmission with and mirror memory 48 O
Steptronic 67 Mirrors 49
– Door lock 35 Mirrors OBD Onboard Diagnos‐
– Fuel filler flap 227 – Automatic Curb Monitor 49 tics 246
– Tailgate 36 Mirrors, folding in and out 50 OBD socket, refer to Socket
Malfunction warnings, refer to Mirrors, heating 50 for OBD Onboard Diagno‐
Check Control 80 Mirrors, interior mirror 50 sis 246
Manual air distribution 109 Octane number, refer to Fuel
quality 228
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
285
Octane rating, refer to Rec‐ Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Pressure warning, tires 91
ommended fuel grade 228 tion 132 Profile depth, refer to Mini‐
Odometer 71 Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐ mum tread depth 237
Office 207 tance Control PDC 103 Profile, tires 236
Oil additives 243 Parking assistant, refer to Programmable memory but‐
Oil consumption 241 Park Distance Control tons, iDrive 22
Oil level 241 PDC 103 Protection function, refer to
Oil, refer to Engine oil 241 Parking brake 61 Pinch protection
Oil types, alternative 243 Parking brake, refer to Park‐ – Panoramic glass sunroof 42
Oil types, approved 243 ing brake 61 Protective function, refer to
Old batteries, disposal 254 Parking lamps 83 Pinch protection
– Windows 41
Onboard Diagnostics Parking lamps/low beams 83
Push-and-turn switch, refer to
OBD 246 Parking lamps, bulb replace‐
Controller 19
Onboard monitor, refer to ment 250, 251
Control Display 18 Partition net 119
Onboard vehicle tool kit 247 Passenger airbags, deactivat‐ R
Opening and closing ing 89
– Comfort Access 37 Radiator fluid, refer to Cool‐
Passenger side mirror, tilt‐
– From the inside 35 ant 244
ing 49
– From the outside 32 Radio-operated key, refer to
PDC Park Distance Con‐
– Using the door lock 34 Remote control with
trol 103
– Using the remote control 32 integrated key 30
Performance Control 99
Operating concept, iDrive 18 Radio ready state 57
Personal information 207
Outside-air mode Radio ready state, switched
Personal Profile 30
– Automatic climate con‐ off 58
Pinch protection
trol 110 Radio ready state, switched
– Panoramic glass sunroof 42
Outside air, refer to Recircu‐ on 57
– Windows 41
lated air mode 110 Radio setting, refer to Radio
Plastic, care 263
Overheating of engine, refer ready state 57
Pollen
to Coolant temperature 72 – Refer to Microfilter/acti‐ Rain sensor 63
vated-charcoal filter with Random 175
P automatic climate con‐ Random playback 175
trol 111 Range 73
Paint, vehicle 262 Poor road operation 132 RDS 167
Pairing, mobile phone 197 Position, storing 146 Reading lights 87
Panic mode 33 Postal code, entering in navi‐ Reading out loud 214
Panoramic glass sunroof 41 gation 145 Rear lamps, refer to Tail
Panoramic glass sunroof Power failure 254 lamps 251
– Convenient operation 32 Power windows Rear luggage rack 136
– Initializing 43 – Safety switch 41 Rear seat backrest
– Opening, closing 42 Power windows, opening and – Foldable 119
– Pinch protection 42 closing 40
– Power failure 43 Power windows, refer to Win‐
– Remote control 32
dows 40
– Tilting 42
Prescribed engine oils, refer
Park Distance Control
to Approved engine oils 243
PDC 103
Pressure, tires 230
Parked-car ventilation 111
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
286
Rear seats Replacement fuse 254 Run-flat tires 239

– Adjusting the backrest Replacement remote con‐ Run-flat tires, tire inflation
tilt 119 trol 30 pressure 230
– Adjusting the head re‐ Replacing wheels/tires 237 Running lights, refer to Park‐
straints 48 Reporting safety defects 9 ing lamps/low beams 83
– Folding down 119
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
– Folding down the back‐
rests 119
gauge 72 S
Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐
Rear socket 118
fer to Washer fluid reser‐ Safe braking 131
Rearview camera, clean‐
voir 65 Safety 6
ing 107
Resetting, Tire Pressure Safety belts 46
Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐
Monitor TPM 94 Safety belts
rors 49
Restraining systems – Damage 47
Rear window defroster 111
– Refer to Safety belts 46 Safety belts, care 263
Rear window, washing 64
Restraint systems for chil‐ Safety belts, indicator/warn‐
Rear window wiper 64
dren 52 ing lamp 47
Recirculated air mode 110
Retaining straps, securing Safety belts, reminder 47
Recommended fuel
cargo 135 Safety switch for rear win‐
grade 228
Retreaded tires 238 dows 41
Recommended tire
Reverse gear Safety systems
brands 238 – Automatic transmission with – Safety belts 46
Redialing 203 Steptronic 66 Safety systems, airbags 88
Refueling 226 Rim cleaner, care 263 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
Remaining distance to desti‐ Road, avoiding 153 tires 239
nation, refer to Com‐ Road detour 153 Satellite radio 168
puter 74 Roadside Assistance 219 Saving fuel 137
Remaining range for service, Roadside parking lamp Scale, changing during navi‐
refer to Service require‐ – Bulb replacement 250, 251 gation 156
ments 78 Roadside parking lamps 85 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
Remaining range, refer to RON recommended fuel play 18
Range 73 grade 228 Search, refer to BMW On‐
Reminders 214 RON, refer to Fuel qual‐ line 220
Remote app 223 ity 228 Seat adjustment
Remote control 30 Roof load capacity 268 – Manual 44
Remote control Roof-mounted luggage Seat adjustment, electric 45
– Battery replacement 38 rack 136 Seat and mirror memory 48
– Comfort Access 37 Rope, refer to Towing 259 Seat belts
– Malfunction 34, 38 Route 154 – Refer to Safety belts 46
– Tailgate 33 Seat heating 46
Route criteria, route 153
Remote control, removing Seats 44
Route, displaying 154
from the ignition lock 57
Route section, bypass‐
Remote control, service
ing 154
data 245
RSC Runflat System Compo‐
Remote control, univer‐
nent, refer to Run-flat
sal 113
tires 239
Remote inquiry 202
Rubber components,
Remote Services 223
care 263
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
287
Seats Shifting Speed, average 73

– Adjusting 44 – Automatic transmission with Speed limit 81
– Adjusting electrically 45 Steptronic 66 Speed limit, setting 82
– Heating 46 Shifting, automatic transmis‐ Speedometer 14
– Memory, refer to Seat and sion with Steptronic 69 Speed, with winter tires 238
mirror memory 48 Shift lever Split screen 22
– Sitting safely 44 – Automatic transmission with Split screen map set‐
– Storing the setting, refer to Steptronic 66
Seat and mirror memory 48 tings 157
Shift paddles 69
Selector lever, automatic Spoken instructions, naviga‐
Shift paddles on the steering
transmission with Step‐ tion 155
wheel 67
tronic 66, 68 Sport program, automatic
Short commands, voice acti‐
Selector lever lock, overrid‐ transmission with Step‐
vation 270
ing 67 tronic 66, 69
Side airbags 88
Selector lever lock, refer to Spray nozzles, refer to Clean‐
Side windows, refer to Win‐
Changing selector lever po‐ ing the windshield and head‐
dows 40
sitions, Shiftlock 66 lamps 64
Sitting safely 44
Selector lever lock, releas‐ Spray nozzles, refer to Wind‐
Size, refer to Dimensions 268
ing 68 shield washer nozzles 64
Ski bag, refer to Ski and
Selector lever positions, auto‐ Stability control systems 97
snowboard bag 122
matic transmission with Start/Stop button 57
Slide/tilt glass roof, refer to
Steptronic 66 Start/Stop button, starting the
Panoramic glass sunroof 41
Sensors, care 264 engine 58
Slot for remote control 57
Service and warranty 7 Start/Stop button, switching
Smokers' package, refer to
Service data in the remote off the engine 59
Ashtray 117
control 245 Starting the engine 58
Snap-in adapter, mobile
Service interval display, refer Start problems, refer to
phone 205
to Condition Based Service Jump-starting 256
Snap-in adapter, refer to
CBS 245 State/province, selecting for
Storage compartment of
Service interval display, refer navigation 144
center armrest 124
to Service requirements 78 Stations, stored 172
Snow chains 239
Service requirements 78 Station, storing 166
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
Service requirements, CBS Status information, iDrive 21
nosis 246
Condition Based Serv‐ Status of Owner's Manual 6
Socket, refer to Connecting
ice 245 Steam jets 261
electrical devices 117
Services, remote 223 Steering wheel 51
Software applications,
Servotronic 100 Steering wheel
iPhone 222 – Shift paddles 67
Settings Software part number 196
– Changing on the Control Steering wheel, adjusting 51
Software update 191 Steering wheel lock 57
Display 77
SOS, refer to Emergency Re‐ Steptronic, refer to Automatic
– Language 77
quest, initiating 255 transmission with Step‐
Settings and information 74
Sound output 166, 174 tronic 65
Settings, configuring, refer to
Spare fuse 254 Steptronic, refer to Sport pro‐
Personal Profile 30
Special destinations, naviga‐ gram and manual mode M/
Settings, DVD 177
tion 147 S 69
Setting the clock, 12h/24h
Special equipment, series Stopping, engine 59
format 76
equipment 6
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
288
Storage compartment Telephone, adjusting the vol‐ Tires, damage 237

nets 125 ume 200 Tire size 235
Storage compart‐ Telephone, installation loca‐ Tires, minimum tread 237
ments 123, 125 tion, refer to Center arm‐ Tires, retreaded tires 238
Storage, tires 239 rest 124 Tires, run-flat tires 239
Storing the seat position, re‐ TeleService 219 Tires, storage 239
fer to Seat and mirror mem‐ Temperature Tire tread 236
ory 48 – Automatic climate con‐ Toll roads, route 153
Storing the vehicle 264 trol 109 Tone 164
Street, entering for naviga‐ – Changing the unit of meas‐ Tool kit, refer to Onboard ve‐
tion 145 ure 75 hicle tool kit 247
Summer tires, refer to Wheels Temperature, coolant, refer to Tools, refer to Onboard vehi‐
and tires 230 Coolant temperature 72 cle tool kit 247
Temperature display
Summer tires, tread 236 Tow bar 259
– External temperature 71
Sun visor 117 Tow fitting 259
– External temperature warn‐
Switches, refer to Cockpit 12 ing 71 Towing 257
Switching off, engine 59 – Setting the unit 75 Towing another vehicle 258
Switching off, vehicle 59 Temperature, engine oil 72 Towing, being towed 258
Switch-on times, parked-car Temperature warning 71 Towing with automatic trans‐
ventilation 112 Text messages 210 mission 258
Symbols 6 Theft alarm system, refer to Town/city, navigation 145
Alarm system 39 Tow rope 259
T Thigh support adjustment 45 Tow-starting 257, 260
Third brake lamp, refer to TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
Tachometer 72 Center brake lamp 253 tor 93
Tailgate 35 Tilt alarm sensor 40 Traction control 98
Tailgate Tilting the passenger side Traffic bulletins, naviga‐
– Comfort Access 37 mirror 49 tion 157
– Emergency operation, refer Transmission
Time
to Opening manually 36 – Automatic transmission with
– Setting the time 75
– Opening from the inside 36 Steptronic 65
– Setting the time zone 76
– Opening from the out‐ – Overriding selector lever
Tire age 235
side 36 lock in case of automatic
Tire identification marks 235
– Opening manually 36 transmission with Step‐
– Remote control 33 Tire inflation pressure 230
tronic 67
Tail lamp, bulb replace‐ Tire inflation pressure, check‐
Transmission, automatic
ment 253 ing 230
transmission with Step‐
Tail lamps 251 Tire pressure monitor, refer to
tronic 68
Tail lamps Flat Tire Monitor 91
Transmission lock
– Bulb replacement 252 Tire Pressure Monitor – Refer to Changing selector
Tank gauge, refer to Fuel TPM 93 lever positions 66
gauge 72 Tire Quality Grading 236 – Refer to P Park 66
Tasks 213 Tires Transmission positions, auto‐
Technical changes, refer to – Inflation pressure 230 matic transmission with
Safety 6 Tires, breaking in 130 Steptronic 68
Technical data 268 Tires, changing 237 Transporting children
Telephone 196 Tires, condition 236 safely 52
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
289
Treble, tone 164 Updates made after the edito‐ W

Trip computer, refer to Dis‐ rial deadline 6
plays on the Control Dis‐ Update, software 191 Warning and indicator
play 74 Upholstery care 262 lamps 15
Trip-distance counter, refer USB audio interface 185 Warning messages, refer to
to Trip odometer 71 USB interface 123 Check Control 80
Triple turn signal activa‐ Warning signal volumes 165
tion 62 V Warning triangle 256
Trip odometer 71 Washer/wiper system 62
Trips, planning 151 Vacuum cleaner, connecting, Washer/wiper system, rain
Trunk, refer to Cargo refer to Connecting electri‐ sensor 63
area 118 cal devices 117 Washer/wiper system, washer
Turning circle, refer to Dimen‐ Vanity mirror 117 fluid 65
sions 268 Vehicle Washer/wiper system, wind‐
Turning lamps, refer to Adap‐ – Identification number 196 shield washer nozzles 64
tive Light Control 84 Vehicle battery, chang‐ Washer fluid 65
Turn signal ing 253 Washer fluid reservoir 65
– Indicator/warning lamp 14 Vehicle, breaking in 130 Washing, vehicle 261
Turn signals 62 Vehicle care 262 Waste tray, refer to Ash‐
Turn signals Vehicle care, refer to tray 117
– Bulb replacement 251 Care 261 Water on roads, refer to Driv‐
– Bulb replacement, front 251 Vehicle equipment 6 ing through water 131
Turn signals, triple turn signal Vehicle identification number, Weights 268
activation 62 refer to Identification num‐ Welcome lamps 83
ber in the engine compart‐ Wheelbase, refer to Dimen‐
U ment 240 sions 268
Vehicle jack 253 Wheel change 253
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/ Vehicle paint 262 Wheels and tires 230
UTQG 236 Vehicle storage 264 Wheels, changing 237
Unintentional alarms, avoid‐ Vehicle, switching off 59 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
ing 40 Vehicle wash 261 FTM 91
Units Ventilation 111 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
– Average fuel consump‐ Ventilation tor TPM 93
tion 75 – Draft-free 111
– Temperature 75 Width, refer to Dimen‐
Ventilation, refer to Parked- sions 268
Units of measure, changing car ventilation 111
on Control Display 75 Window, Convenient opera‐
Version of the navigation tion 32
Universal remote control 113 data 142
Unlocking Windows 40
Video playback 176 Windows
– From the outside 32
Voice activation – Safety switch 41
– Setting the unlocking char‐
– Navigation 150 Windows, defrosting and de‐
acteristics 32
Voice activation, short com‐ fogging
– Tailgate 37
– Without remote control, re‐ mands 270 – Automatic climate con‐
fer to Comfort Access 37 Voice activation system 25 trol 110
Unlocking, from the inside 35 Volume, setting 164 Windows, pinch protec‐
Unlocking, hood 241 tion 41
Windshield, cleaning 64
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
290
Windshield, defrosting, refer

to Defrosting windows 110
Windshield wash 62
Windshield washer fluid 65
Windshield wash, rear win‐
dow 64
Windshield wash, reservoir for
washer fluid 65
Windshield wash, washer
fluid 65
Windshield wash, washer
nozzles 64
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 247
Windshield wiper, refer to
Washer/wiper system 62
Winter storage, care 264
Winter tires, setting the speed
limit 82
Winter tires, suitable
tires 238
Winter tires, tread 237
Wiper blades, changing 247
Wiper fluid 65
Wood, care 263
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 23
Working in the engine com‐
partment 241
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 247
X
xDrive 99
Xenon headlamps
– Bulb replacement 250
Y
Your individual vehicle
– Settings, refer to Personal
Profile 30
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
291
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
More about BMW
The Ultimate
bmwusa.com Driving Machine
01 40 2 957 353 ue
*BL2957353006* I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

2014 x1 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

2014 x1 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Contents Owner's Manual

A-Z The Ultimate

THE BMW X1.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 957 353 - X/14

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 957 353 - X/14

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 957 353 - X/14

ADDENDUM TO BMW X1 OWNER’S

recommends using genuine parts the maintenance carried out by your

8. At page 138, under the heading: The manufacturer of your vehicle

recommends that you maintain messages of these comfort

19. At page 248 and page 250, where it

20. At page 253, under the “Battery

Use of recommended vehicle

The manufacturer of your vehicle

After a battery replacement, the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 957 353 - X/14

▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Data memory

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 957 353 - X/14

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 957 353 - X/14

All around the steering wheel

1 Safety switch for rear power win‐ Automatic headlamp con‐

5 Steering column stalk, left

Turn signal 62 Change the radio station

High-beam Assistant 85 Next entertainment source

Roadside parking lamps 85 Recirculated air mode 110

1 Speedometer ▷ Hill Descent Control 99

5 Display for ▷ Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor 94

▷ Clock 71 ▷ Checking engine oil level 241

▷ External temperature 71 ▷ Settings and information 74

▷ Indicator/warning lamps 15 ▷ Check Control message

Indicator/warning lights Symbol Function or system

Front fog lamps, refer to page 86

The parking brake is set, refer to

Several of the lights are checked for proper

Canada: engine malfunction with

Supplementary text messages

Indicator lights without text messages

Symbol Function or system

Turn signals, refer to page 62

High-beams/headlamp flasher, refer

All around the center console

1 Headliner 17 Deactivate the Automatic Engine

3 Air vent 111 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

5 Automatic climate control 108

All around the headliner

1 Emergency Request 255 4 Reading lamps 87

2 Panoramic glass sunroof 41 5 Interior lamps 87

3 Indicator lamp for the front pas‐

The concept Switching off

Using the iDrive during a trip

Controller Press the but‐ Function

1. Turn. NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

3. Move in four directions.

The main menu is displayed.

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

Press the but‐ Function

MENU Opens the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia